Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 308

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System

V100R002C00

Commissioning and Configuration


Guide
Issue

03

Date

2014-11-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2014. All rights reserved.


No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address:

Huawei Industrial Base


Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website:

http://www.huawei.com

Email:

support@huawei.com

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

About This Document


Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name

Version

OptiX RTN 380

V100R002C00

iManager U2000T

V200R014C60

Intended Audience
This document describes how to commission OptiX RTN 380, including preparations, site
commissioning, system commissioning, and network-wide service data configuration.
This document is intended for:
l

Installation and commissioning engineers

Data configuration engineers

System maintenance engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol

Description
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ii

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

Symbol

Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation
which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.
Calls attention to important information, best
practices and tips.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment damage,
and environment deterioration.

General Conventions
The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Times New Roman

Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface

Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic

Book titles are in italics.

Courier New

Examples of information displayed on the screen are in


Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Convention

Description

Boldface

The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic

Command arguments are in italics.

[]

Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

Convention

Description

{ x | y | ... }

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ]

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }*

Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]*

Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention

Description

Boldface

Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

>

Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Change History
Changes between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issue contains all the
changes made in earlier issues.

Updates in Issue 03 (2014-11-30) Based on Product Version V100R002C00


This document is the third release of the V100R002C00 version.
Change

Description

Fixed the known bugs.

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-10-15) Based on Product Version V100R002C00


This document is the second release of the V100R002C00 version.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iv

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

About This Document

Change

Description

Fixed the known bugs.

5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the


Equipment

Supplements the Wi-Fi connection mode for


Web LCT.

5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method

Issue 01 (2014-06-30)
This issue is the first release for the product version V100R002C00.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii
1 Safety Precautions.........................................................................................................................1
1.1 General Safety Precautions.............................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols.........................................................................................................................................3
1.3 Electrical Safety..............................................................................................................................................................4
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas.....................................................................................................................................5
1.5 Storage Batteries.............................................................................................................................................................6
1.6 Radiation.........................................................................................................................................................................8
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers.......................................................................................................................................8
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure...........................................................................................................................................9
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas..........................................................................................................................................................9
1.6.4 Laser............................................................................................................................................................................9
1.6.5 Microwave.................................................................................................................................................................10
1.7 Working at Heights.......................................................................................................................................................10
1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects.............................................................................................................................................11
1.7.2 Using Ladders............................................................................................................................................................12
1.8 Mechanical Safety........................................................................................................................................................14
1.9 Other Precautions.........................................................................................................................................................15

2 Commissioning Preparations....................................................................................................17
2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools...................................................................................................................................18
2.2 Preparing the Certificate File for NE Access from a USB Flash Drive.......................................................................19
2.3 Preparing a USB Flash Drive.......................................................................................................................................21
2.4 Determining the Commissioning Method....................................................................................................................22
2.5 Checking Commissioning Conditions..........................................................................................................................23
2.5.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions................................................................................................................24
2.5.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions..........................................................................................................24

3 Commissioning Process.............................................................................................................25
3.1 Site Commissioning Process (Without 1+1 Protection)...............................................................................................26
3.2 Site Commissioning Procedure (with 1+1 Protection).................................................................................................27
3.3 System Commissioning Process...................................................................................................................................31

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data).................................33


Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vi

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

4.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380......................................................................................................................................34


4.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)..................................................................................................................34
4.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)................................................................................................37
4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive............................................................................................38
4.3 Using the Web LCT to Complete Subsequent Commissioning Items.........................................................................39

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)..........................................41


5.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380......................................................................................................................................43
5.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)..................................................................................................................43
5.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)................................................................................................46
5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment................................................................................................................47
5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method.......................................................................................................................51
5.4 Delivering a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using the Web LCT....................................................................53
5.5 Configuring Site Commissioning Data.........................................................................................................................54
5.5.1 Changing an NE ID...................................................................................................................................................55
5.5.2 Changing an NE Name..............................................................................................................................................56
5.5.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN.......................................................................................56
5.5.4 Deleting an E-LAN Service.......................................................................................................................................57
5.5.5 Creating a LAG.........................................................................................................................................................58
5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link..........................................................................................................59
5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group...........................................................60
5.6 Checking Alarms..........................................................................................................................................................61
5.7 Aligning Antennas........................................................................................................................................................62
5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes........................................................................................................................................62
5.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas.........................................................................................................................65
5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power...........................................................................................67

6 System Commissioning..............................................................................................................69
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data.....................................................................................................................71
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services.............................................................................................................................................71
6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis.........................................................................................71
6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode.....................................................................................74
6.3 Verifying CPRI Service Configurations.......................................................................................................................76
6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting...............................................................................................................................................79
6.5 Testing Protection Switching........................................................................................................................................80
6.5.1 Testing ERPS Switching...........................................................................................................................................80
6.5.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching.............................................................................................................................83
6.6 Checking the Clock Status............................................................................................................................................85
6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link........................................................................................................86
6.8 Testing Ethernet Service Performance.........................................................................................................................88
6.8.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio.........................................................................................88
6.8.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio.................................................................................................................91
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment......................................................96


7.1 Handling a Fault in Commissioning Script Loading Using a USB Flash Drive..........................................................97
7.2 Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the Design Requirements...........................................................98

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data..............................................................................100


8.1 Configuration Preparations.........................................................................................................................................102
8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools..............................................................................................................................102
8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions........................................................................................................................102
8.1.3 U2000 Quick Start...................................................................................................................................................102
8.1.3.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client...............................................................................................................................103
8.1.3.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client............................................................................................................................104
8.1.3.3 Using the Help......................................................................................................................................................104
8.1.3.4 Navigating to Common Views.............................................................................................................................105
8.1.3.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology...........................................................................................................................105
8.1.3.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer................................................................................................................................106
8.1.3.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel...............................................................................................................................107
8.2 General Configuration Process...................................................................................................................................107
8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples.........................................................................................109
8.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................................109
8.3.2 Microwave Chain Network.....................................................................................................................................111
8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network.......................................................................................................................................112
8.3.4 Hybrid Network Consisting of Radio Equipment and Optical Fibers.....................................................................112
8.3.5 Large-Capacity Microwave Backhaul Network Configured with 1+1 Protection..................................................113
8.3.6 Network for Transparently Transmitting CPRI Services over Microwave Signals................................................114
8.4 Configuring the Network Topology...........................................................................................................................115
8.4.1 Basic Concepts........................................................................................................................................................115
8.4.1.1 Introduction to DCN.............................................................................................................................................115
8.4.1.2 IP DCN.................................................................................................................................................................120
8.4.1.3 Fiber/Cable Types.................................................................................................................................................124
8.4.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology)...........................................................................................................125
8.4.3 Configuration Example (Network Topology).........................................................................................................127
8.4.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................127
8.4.3.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................128
8.5 Configuring Microwave Links...................................................................................................................................133
8.5.1 Configuration Process (Microwave Links)..............................................................................................................133
8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network)..........................................................................135
8.5.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................135
8.5.2.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................137
8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links with 1+1 Protection)...........................................................................139
8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................139
8.5.3.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................140
8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services ...................................................................................................................................144
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

viii

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.6.1 Port Description.......................................................................................................................................................145


8.6.2 Ethernet Service Types............................................................................................................................................146
8.6.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service...................................................................................146
8.6.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service................................................................................................................................148
8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services................................................................................................................................149
8.6.2.4 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services.......................................................................................................152
8.6.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services.......................................................................................................153
8.6.2.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services................................................................................................................154
8.6.3 Configuration Process..............................................................................................................................................156
8.6.3.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services).............................157
8.6.3.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service)........................160
8.6.3.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)..........................................................................163
8.6.3.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Service).....................................................................166
8.6.3.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...................................................169
8.6.3.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-Based E-LAN Service).............................................172
8.6.3.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)...................................................175
8.6.3.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service).............................................178
8.6.4 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)...........................................181
8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................182
8.6.4.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Protection).................................................................183
8.6.4.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)................................................................185
8.6.4.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS).........................................................................................186
8.6.4.5 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification).................................................189
8.6.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)................................................................................192
8.6.4.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)...........................................................193
8.6.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................194
8.6.4.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)..........................................................197
8.6.5 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Services)........................................................................................198
8.6.5.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................198
8.6.5.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)................................................................200
8.6.5.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS).........................................................................................202
8.6.5.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification).................................................205
8.6.5.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)...........................................................208
8.6.5.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................209
8.6.5.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)..........................................................212
8.6.6 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service)..................................................................213
8.6.6.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................213
8.6.6.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection).......................................................................................215
8.6.6.3 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)......................................................................................216
8.6.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS)...............................................................................................................217
8.6.6.5 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification).......................................................................219
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.6.6.6 End-to-EndConfiguration Procedure (Ethernet Protection).................................................................................222


8.6.6.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)...............................................................................223
8.6.6.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................223
8.6.6.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)................................................................226
8.6.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services).................................................................227
8.6.7.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................227
8.6.7.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)................................................................229
8.6.7.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS).........................................................................................231
8.6.7.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification).................................................234
8.6.7.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)...............................................................................237
8.6.7.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)........................................................................................................238
8.6.7.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)..........................................................241
8.7 Configuring CPRI Services........................................................................................................................................242
8.7.1 Configuration Process (CPRI Services)..................................................................................................................242
8.7.2 Configuration Example (CPRI Services)................................................................................................................243
8.7.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................244
8.7.2.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................244
8.8 Configuring Clocks.....................................................................................................................................................245
8.8.1 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock).........................................................................................................245
8.8.2 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain Network)..........................................................................247
8.8.2.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................247
8.8.2.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................248
8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network)............................................................................250
8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram............................................................................................................................................250
8.8.3.2 Configuration Procedure.......................................................................................................................................251
8.9 Common Service Configuration Operations..............................................................................................................253
8.9.1 Configuring the Network Topology........................................................................................................................254
8.9.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method.......................................................................................................254
8.9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually.....................................................................................................................................256
8.9.1.3 Changing an NE ID..............................................................................................................................................257
8.9.1.4 Changing an NE Name.........................................................................................................................................258
8.9.1.5 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN..................................................................................259
8.9.1.6 Configuring Access Control.................................................................................................................................260
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method...........................................................................................261
8.9.1.8 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually.........................................................................................................................262
8.9.2 Configuring Microwave Links................................................................................................................................263
8.9.2.1 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group.......................................................................................................264
8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link...................................................................................................................266
8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)...............................................................................267
8.9.3 Configuring Ethernet Services on a Per-NE Basis..................................................................................................268
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG....................................................................................................................................................269
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Contents

8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance...................................................................................................................................272


8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service.................................................................273
8.9.3.4 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service..............................................................................................................274
8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................275
8.9.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................276
8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge......................................................................................................277
8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line Service...................................................................................................................................278
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service..................................................................................................................................279
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain.........................................................................................................280
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port.....................................................................................................281
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port..................................................................................282
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies.........................................................................................................283
8.9.4 Configuring Ethernet Services (in End-to-End Mode)............................................................................................284
8.9.4.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services................................................................................................................285
8.9.4.2 Creating a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service.................................................................286
8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service..............................................................................................................287
8.9.4.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................288
8.9.4.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service.....................................................................................290
8.9.5 Configuring CPRI Services.....................................................................................................................................291
8.9.6 Configuring Clocks..................................................................................................................................................293
8.9.6.1 Configuring the System Clock Source.................................................................................................................293
8.9.6.2 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources...........................................................................................................294

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions

About This Chapter


This topic describes the safety precautions that you must follow when installing, operating, and
maintaining Huawei devices.
1.1 General Safety Precautions
This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.
1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols
Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
1.3 Electrical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.
1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas
This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
1.5 Storage Batteries
This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.
1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.7 Working at Heights
This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.
1.8 Mechanical Safety
This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.
1.9 Other Precautions
This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.1 General Safety Precautions


This topic describes essential safety precautions that instruct you in the selection of measuring
and testing instruments when you install, operate, and maintain Huawei devices.

All Safety Precautions


To ensure the safety of humans and a device, follow the marks on the device and all the safety
precautions in this document when installing, operating, and maintaining a device.
The "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" marks in this document do not cover all the
safety precautions that must be followed. They are supplements to the safety precautions.

Local Laws and Regulations


When operating a device, always comply with the local laws and regulations. The safety
precautions provided in the documents are in addition/supplementary to the local laws and
regulations.

Basic Installation Requirements


The installation and maintenance personnel of Huawei devices must receive strict training and
be familiar with the proper operation methods and safety precautions before any operation.
l

Only trained and qualified personnel are permitted to install, operate, and maintain a device.

Only certified professionals are permitted to remove the safety facilities, and to troubleshoot
and maintain the device.

Only the personnel authenticated or authorized by Huawei are permitted to replace or


change the device or parts of the device (including software).

The operating personnel must immediately report the faults or errors that may cause safety
problems to the person in charge.

Grounding Requirements
The grounding requirements are applicable to the device that needs to be grounded.
l

When installing the device, always connect the grounding facilities first. When removing
the device, always disconnect the grounding facilities last.

Ensure that the grounding conductor is intact.

Do not operate the device in the absence of a suitably installed grounding conductor.

The device must be connected to the protection ground (PGND) permanently. Before
operating the device, check the electrical connections of the device, and ensure that the
device is properly grounded.

Human Safety
l

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

When there is a risk of a lightning strike, do not operate the fixed terminal or touch the
cables.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

When there is risk of a lightning strike, unplug the AC power connector. Do not use the
fixed terminal or touch the terminal or antenna connector.
NOTE

The preceding requirements apply to wireless fixed station terminals.

To avoid electric shocks, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuits to
telephone-network voltage (TNV) circuits.

Do not look into optical ports without eye protection. Otherwise, human eyes may be hurt
by laser beams.

Before operating the device, wear an ESD protective coat, ESD gloves, and an ESD wrist
strap. In addition, you need to get off the conductive objects, such as jewelry and watches,
to prevent electric shock and burn.

In case of fire, escape from the building or site where the device is located and press the
fire alarm bell or dial the telephone number for fire alarms. Do not enter the burning building
again in any situation.

Before any operation, install the device firmly on the ground or other rigid objects, such as
on a wall or in a rack.

When the system is working, ensure that the ventilation hole is not blocked.

When installing the front panel, use a tool to tighten the screws firmly, if required.

After installing the device, clean up the packing materials.

Device Safety

1.2 Warning and Safety Symbols


Before using the equipment, note the following warning and safety symbols on the equipment.
Table 1-1 lists the warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 380 and their meanings.
Table 1-1 Warning and safety symbols of the OptiX RTN 380
Label

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Label Name

Description

ESD protection label

Indicates that the equipment is


sensitive to static electricity.

Radiation warning label

Indicates that the equipment


generates electromagnetic
radiation.

High temperature warning label

Indicates that the equipment


surface temperature may exceed
70C when the ambient
temperature is higher than 55C.
Wear protective gloves to handle
the equipment.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Label

1 Safety Precautions

Label Name

Description

Grounding label

Indicates the grounding position


of a chassis.

1.3 Electrical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for high voltage, lightning strikes, high leakage current,
power cables, fuses, and ESD.

High Voltage

DANGER
l A high-voltage power supply provides power for device operations. Direct human contact
with the high voltage power supply or human contact through damp objects can be fatal.
l Unspecified or unauthorized high voltage operations could result in fire or electric shock, or
both.

Thunderstorm
The requirements apply only to wireless base stations or devices with antennas and feeders.

DANGER
Do not perform operations on high voltage, AC power, towers, or backstays in stormy weather
conditions.

High Leakage Current

CAUTION
Before powering on a device, ground the device. Otherwise, the safety of humans and the device
cannot be ensured.
If a high leakage current mark is labeled near the power connector of the device, you must
connect the PGND terminal on the shell to the ground before connecting the device to an A/C
input power supply. This is to prevent the electric shock caused by leakage current of the device.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Power Cables

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cable with a live line. Transient contact between the core of
the power cable and the conductor may generate electric arc or spark, which may cause fire or
eye injury.
l

Before installing or removing power cables, you must power off the device.

Before connecting a power cable, you must ensure that the label on the power cable is
correct.

Device with Power On

DANGER
Installing or removing a device is prohibited if the device is on.

DANGER
Do not install or remove the power cables of the equipment when it is powered on.

Short Circuits
When installing and maintaining devices, place and use the associated tools and instruments in
accordance with regulations to avoid short-circuits caused by metal objects.

Fuse

CAUTION
If the fuse on a device blows, replace the fuse with a fuse of the same type and specifications to
ensure safe operation of the device.

1.4 Environment of Flammable Gas


This topic describes safety precautions for the operating environment of a device.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

DANGER
Do not place or operate devices in an environment of flammable or explosive air or gas.
Operating an electronic device in an environment of flammable gas causes a severe hazard.

1.5 Storage Batteries


This topic describes safety precautions for operations of storage batteries.

DANGER
Before operating a storage battery, you must read the safety precautions carefully and be familiar
with the method of connecting a storage battery.
l

Incorrect operations of storage batteries cause hazards. During operation, prevent any shortcircuit, and prevent the electrolyte from overflowing or leakage.

If the electrolyte overflows, it causes potential hazards to the device. The electrolyte may
corrode metal parts and the circuit boards, and ultimately damage the circuit boards.

A storage battery contains a great deal of energy. Misoperations may cause a short-circuit,
which leads to human injuries.

Basic Precautions
To ensure safety, note the following points before installing or maintaining the storage battery:
l

Use special insulation tools.

Wear an eye protector and take effective protection measures.

Wear rubber gloves and a protection coat to prevent the hazard caused by the overflowing
electrolyte.

When handling the storage battery, ensure that its electrodes are upward. Leaning or
reversing the storage battery is prohibited.

Before installing or maintaining the storage battery, ensure that the storage battery is
disconnected from the power supply that charges the storage battery.

Short-Circuit

DANGER
A battery short-circuit may cause human injuries. Although the voltage of an ordinary battery
is low, the instantaneous high current caused by a short-circuit emits a great deal of energy.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Avoid any short-circuit of batteries caused by metal objects. If possible, disconnect the working
battery before performing other operations.

Hazardous Gas

NOTICE
Do not use any unsealed lead-acid storage battery. Lay a storage battery horizontally and fix it
properly to prevent the battery from emitting flammable gas, which may cause fire or device
erosion.
Working lead-acid storage batteries emit flammable gas. Therefore, ventilation and fireproofing
measures must be taken at the sites where lead-acid storage batteries are placed.

Battery Temperature

NOTICE
If a battery overheats, the battery may be deformed or damaged, and the electrolyte may
overflow.
When the temperature of the battery is higher than 60C, you need to check whether the
electrolyte overflows. If the electrolyte overflows, take appropriate measures immediately.

Battery Leakage

NOTICE
In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up appropriately.
When handling a leaky battery, protect against the possible damage caused by the acid. When
you find the electrolyte leaks, you can use the following substances to counteract and absorb the
leaking electrolyte:
l

Sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3)

Sodium carbonate (Na2CO3)

In the event of acid overflow or spillage, neutralize the acid and clean it up as recommended by
the battery manufacturer and any local regulations for acid disposal.
If a person contacts battery electrolyte, clean the skin that contacts the battery electrolyte
immediately by using water. In case of a severe situation, the person must be sent to a hospital
immediately.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.6 Radiation
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure and lasers.
1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers
The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure
This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
1.6.3 Forbidden Areas
The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.
1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

1.6.1 Safe Usage of Optical Fibers


The laser beam can cause damage to your eyes. Hence, you must exercise caution when using
optical fibers.

DANGER
When installing or maintaining optical fibers, avoid direct eye exposure to the laser beams
launched from the optical interface or fiber connectors. The laser beam can cause damage to
your eyes.

Cleaning Fiber Connectors and Optical Interfaces

NOTICE
If fiber connectors or flanges are contaminated, optical power commissioning is seriously
affected. Therefore, the two endfaces and flange of every external fiber must be cleaned before
the fiber is led into the equipment through the optical distribution frame (ODF) for being inserted
into an optical interface on the equipment.
The fiber connectors and optical interfaces of the lasers must be cleaned with the following
special cleaning tools and materials:
l

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Special cleaning solvent: It is preferred to use isoamylol. Propyl alcohol, however, can also
be used. It is prohibited that you use alcohol and formalin.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Non-woven lens tissue

Special compressed gas

Cotton stick (medical cotton or long fiber cotton)

Special cleaning roll, used with the recommended cleaning solvent

Special magnifier for fiber connectors

1 Safety Precautions

1.6.2 Electromagnetic Exposure


This topic describes safety precautions for electromagnetic exposure.
If multiple transmit antennas are installed on a tower or backstay, keep away from the transmit
directions of the antennas when you install or maintain an antenna locally.

NOTICE
Ensure that all personnel are beyond the transmit direction of a working antenna.

1.6.3 Forbidden Areas


The topic describes requirements for a forbidden area.
l

Before entering an area where the electromagnetic radiation is beyond the specified range,
the associated personnel must shut down the electromagnetic radiator or stay at least 10
meters away from the electromagnetic radiator, if in the transmit direction.

A physical barrier and an eye-catching warning flag should be available in each forbidden
area.

1.6.4 Laser
This topic describes safety precautions for lasers.

CAUTION
When handling optical fibers, do not stand close to, or look into the optical fiber outlet directly
without eye protection.
Laser transceivers are used in the optical transmission system and associated test tools. The laser
transmitted through the bare optical fiber produces a small beam of light, and therefore it has
very high power density and is invisible to human eyes. When a beam of light enters eyes, the
eyes may be damaged.
In normal cases, viewing an un-terminated optical fiber or a damaged optical fiber without eye
protection at a distance greater than 150 mm does not cause eye injury. Eye injury may occur,
however, if an optical tool such as a microscope, magnifying glass, or eye loupe is used to view
an un-terminated optical fiber.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Safety Instructions Regarding Lasers


To avoid laser radiation, obey the following instructions:
l

All operations should be performed by authorized personnel who have completed the
required training courses.

Wear a pair of eye-protective glasses when you are handling lasers or fibers.

Ensure that the optical source is switched off before disconnecting optical fiber connectors.

Do not look into the end of an exposed fiber or an open connector when you are not sure
whether the optical source is switched off.

Use an optical power meter to measure the optical power and ensure that the optical source
is switched off.

Before opening the front door of an optical transmission device, ensure that you are not
exposed to laser radiation.

Do not use an optical tool such as a microscope, a magnifying glass, or an eye loupe to
view the optical connector or fiber that is transmitting optical signals.

Instructions Regarding Fiber Handling


Read and abide by the following instructions before handling fibers:
l

Only trained personnel are permitted to cut and splice fibers.

Before cutting or splicing a fiber, ensure that the fiber is disconnected from the optical
source. After disconnecting the fiber, cap to the fiber connectors.

1.6.5 Microwave
When installing and maintaining the equipment of Huawei, follow the safety precautions of
microwave to ensure the safety of the human body and the equipment.

CAUTION
Strong radio frequency can harm the human body.
When installing or maintaining an aerial on the tower or mast that is installed with multiple
aerials, switch off the transmitter in advance.

1.7 Working at Heights


This topic describes safety precautions for working at heights.

CAUTION
When working at heights, be cautious to prevent objects from falling down.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

The requirements for working at heights are as follows:


l

The personnel who work at heights must be trained.

Carry and handle the operating machines and tools with caution to prevent them from falling
down.

Safety measures, such as wearing a helmet and a safety belt, must be taken.

Wear cold-proof clothes when working at heights in cold areas.

Check all lifting appliances thoroughly before starting the work, and ensure that they are
intact.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects


This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when
installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.
1.7.2 Using Ladders
This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

1.7.1 Hoisting Heavy Objects


This topic describes the safety precautions for hoisting heavy objects that you must follow when
installing, operating, and maintaining Huawei devices.

CAUTION
When heavy objects are being hoisted, do not walk below the cantilever or hoisted objects.
l

Only trained and qualified personnel can perform hoisting operations.

Before hoisting heavy objects, check that the hoisting tools are complete and in good
condition.

Before hoisting heavy objects, ensure that the hoisting tools are fixed to a secure object or
wall with good weight-bearing capacity.

Issue orders with short and explicit words to ensure correct operations.

Ensure that the angle between the two cables is less than or equal to 90 degrees during the
lifting, as shown in Figure 1-1.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-1 Hoisting heavy objects

1.7.2 Using Ladders


This topic describes safety precautions for using ladders.

Checking Ladders
l

Before using a ladder, check whether the ladder is damaged. After checking that the ladder
is in good condition, you can use the ladder.

Before using a ladder, you should know the maximum weight capacity of the ladder. Avoid
overweighing the ladder.

Placing Ladders
The proper slant angle of the ladder is 75 degrees. You can measure the slant angle of the ladder
with an angle square or your arms, as shown in Figure 1-2. When using a ladder, to prevent the
ladder from sliding, ensure that the wider feet of the ladder are downward, or take protection
measures for the ladder feet. Ensure that the ladder is placed securely.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

Figure 1-2 Slanting a ladder

Climbing Up a Ladder
When climbing up a ladder, pay attention to the following points:
l

Ensure that the center of gravity of your body does not deviate from the edges of the two
long sides.

Before operations, ensure that your body is stable to reduce risks.

Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder (counted from up to down).

If you want to climb up a roof, ensure that the ladder top is at least one meter higher than the
roof, as shown in Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-3 Ladder top being one meter higher than the roof

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

1.8 Mechanical Safety


This topic describes safety precautions for drilling holes, handling sharp objects, operating fans,
and carrying heavy objects.

Drilling Holes

CAUTION
Do not drill holes on the cabinet without prior permission. Drilling holes without complying
with the requirements affects the electromagnetic shielding performance of the cabinet and
damages the cables inside the cabinet. In addition, if the scraps caused by drilling enter the
cabinet, the printed circuit boards (PCBs) may be short-circuited.
l

Before drilling a hole on the cabinet, remove the cables inside the cabinet.

Wear an eye protector when drilling holes. This is to prevent eyes from being injured by
the splashing metal scraps.

Wear protection gloves when drilling holes.

Take measures to prevent the metallic scraps from falling into the cabinet. After the drilling,
clean up the metallic scraps.

Sharp Objects

CAUTION
Wear protection gloves when carrying the device. This is to prevent hands from being injured
by the sharp edges of the device.

Fans
l

When replacing parts, place the objects such as the parts, screws, and tools properly. This
is to prevent them from falling into the operating fans, which damages the fans or device.

When replacing the parts near fans, keep your fingers or boards from touching operating
fans before the fans are powered off and stop running. Otherwise, the hands or the boards
are damaged.

Carrying Heavy Objects


Wear protection gloves when carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent hands from being hurt.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

CAUTION
l The carrier must be prepared for load bearing before carrying heavy objects. This is to prevent
the carrier from being strained or pressed by the heavy objects.
l When you pull a chassis out of the cabinet, pay attention to the unstable or heavy objects on
the cabinet. This is to prevent the heavy objects on the cabinet top from falling down, which
may hurt you.
l

Generally, two persons are needed to carry a chassis. It is prohibited that only one person
carries a heavy chassis. When carrying a chassis, the carriers should stretch their backs and
move stably to avoid being strained.

When moving or lifting a chassis, hold the handles or bottom of the chassis. Do not hold
the handles of the modules installed in the chassis, such as the power modules, fan modules,
and boards.

1.9 Other Precautions


This topic describes safety precautions for removing and inserting boards, binding signal cables,
and routing cables.

Removing and Inserting a Board

NOTICE
When inserting a board, wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves, and handle the board gently to
avoid distorting pins on the backplane.
l

Slide the board along the guide rails.

Do not contact one board with another to avoid short-circuits or damage.

When holding a board in hand, do not touch the board circuits, components, connectors,
or connection slots of the board to prevent damage caused by ESD of the human body to
the electrostatic-sensitive components.

Binding Signal Cables

NOTICE
Bind the signal cables separately from the high-current or high-voltage cables.

Routing Cables
In the case of extremely low temperature, heavy shock or vibration may damage the plastic skin
of the cables. To ensure the construction safety, comply with the following requirements:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

15

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

1 Safety Precautions

When installing cables, ensure that the environment temperature is above 0C.

If the cables are stored in a place where the ambient temperature is below 0C, transfer
them to a place at room temperature and store the cables for more than 24 hours before
installation.

Handle the cables gently, especially in a low-temperature environment. Do not perform


any improper operations, for example, pushing the cables down directly from a truck.

High Temperature

CAUTION
If the ambient temperature exceeds 55C, the temperature of the front panel surface marked the
flag may exceed 70C. When touching the front panel of the board in such an environment,
you must wear the protection gloves.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

16

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

Commissioning Preparations

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the preparations that must be made prior to commissioning equipment.
The preparation process is as follows:
2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools
This section lists the documents and tools to be obtained prior to equipment commissioning.
2.2 Preparing the Certificate File for NE Access from a USB Flash Drive
This section describes how to prepare an RTN.CER file used for certification of NE access from
a USB flash drive. The file allows you to perform site commissioning, database backup/
restoration, and software upgrades using a USB flash drive.
2.3 Preparing a USB Flash Drive
Prepare a USB flash drive if it is required for commissioning.
2.4 Determining the Commissioning Method
According to the scale of a microwave transmission network, commissioning engineers can use
the single-hop commissioning method or system commissioning method.
2.5 Checking Commissioning Conditions
Ensure that the equipment meets the requirements for site commissioning or system
commissioning prior to performing any commissioning tasks.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

17

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

2.1 Preparing Documents and Tools


This section lists the documents and tools to be obtained prior to equipment commissioning.

Documents
Obtain the following documents before equipment commissioning:
l

Engineering design documents, including:


Network Plan
Engineering Design

Commissioning guide, including:


OptiX RTN 380 Microwave Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration
Guide

Tools
Prepare the tools listed in Table 2-1 before equipment commissioning.
Table 2-1 Tools
Tool

Application Scenario

Adjustable wrench, screwdriver, telescope,


interphone, hex key (delivered with
antennas), multimeter, north-stabilized
indicator, and received signal strength
indicator (RSSI) test cable (delivered with
OptiX RTN 380)

Aligning antennas

A laptop with the Web LCT installed

l Configuring site commissioning data


l Checking the microwave link status and
receive power
l Testing adaptive modulation (AM)
shifting
l Checking alarms

Network management system (NMS) server

Performing system commissioning items

NOTE

For details about the requirements and methods for installing the Web LCT, see the iManager U2000 Web
LCT User Guide.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

18

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

2.2 Preparing the Certificate File for NE Access from a USB


Flash Drive
This section describes how to prepare an RTN.CER file used for certification of NE access from
a USB flash drive. The file allows you to perform site commissioning, database backup/
restoration, and software upgrades using a USB flash drive.

Prerequisites
The NMS is available.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the similar to those on the U2000.

Procedure
Step 1 Optional: Query the encryption algorithm used for the NE password and set related parameters
accordingly.

Step 2 Access the directory for saving the USB file generation tool.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

19

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

NOTE

l On the U2000, the tool is stored under D:\oss\client\client\tools\usbtool (an example).


l On the Web LCT, the tool is stored under D:\WebLCT\weblct\tools\usbtool (an example).

Step 3 Run startup_usbTool.bat.

The USB File Generation Tool dialog box is displayed.


Step 4 Generate a certification file for NE access from a USB flash drive.
1.

Enter the user name and password for logging in to the NE to be commissioned.
NOTE

l Default user name: szhw


l Default password: nesoft

2.

Select an encryption type according to the encryption algorithm used by the NE.
NOTE

l The encryption type supported by the equipment is PBKDF2.


l If you do not know the encryption algorithm used by the NE, select All. In this case, the certification
file generated by the USB file generation tool includes three segments of ciphertexts for the password.
Each segment corresponds to one algorithm from MD5, SHA256, and PBKDF2. The NE decrypts the
ciphertexts according to the used encryption algorithm.
l If PBKDF2 or All is selected, set SSL Certificate and Certificate File Path. SSL Certificate includes
two types: Default and Custom.
l If you want to use the default certificate file of the U2000, select Default. The default certificate
file server.p12 is saved in the U2000 server path (such as D:\oss\server\etc\ssl\nemanager\default
\keyStore\PFX\), and the default key is Changeme_123, so this file can be used only when the
USB file generation tool is run on the U2000 server. If you want to use another certificate file,
select Custom.
l Customized certificates include two types: *.crt and *.p12. A *.p12 certificate is encrypted, so a
key is required.
l Both *.crt and *.p12 certificates need to be synchronized with the NE. For details, see the U2000
Administrator Guide.

3.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Click Generate File.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

20

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

Step 5 Click OK in the displayed confirmation dialog box.

Step 6 Go to the directory where the RTN.CER file is stored, and copy it to the root directory of the
USB flash drive.
NOTE

l On the U2000, the RTN.CER file is stored under D:\oss\client\client\tools\usbtool\output (an example).
l On the Web LCT, the RTN.CER file is stored under D:\WebLCT\weblct\tools\usbtool\output (an
example).
l Save the RTN.CER file before closing the USB file generation tool. Otherwise, the file will be automatically
deleted when you close the tool.

Step 7 Click Close.


----End

2.3 Preparing a USB Flash Drive


Prepare a USB flash drive if it is required for commissioning.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


USB Flash Drive
The USB flash drive model recommended for OptiX RTN 380 is Locitech U208 (4 GB). If a
USB flash drive of another model or capacity is required, contact the local Huawei office for
confirmation. Not all USB flash drives are supported by OptiX RTN 380.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

21

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

Procedure
Step 1 Prepare the command script and RTN.CER file. If the NE software needs to be upgraded,
prepare the required NE software package and patch package.
Step 2 Format the USB flash drive into an an FAT32 file system using Windows. Then create the
following directory structure on the USB flash drive.
Root directory
l \pkg
l \patch
l \script
l \devtype
Step 3 Copy the prepared files to the USB flash drive.
Table 2-2 Content and Storage Paths on the USB Flash Drive
Data

Storage Directory

NE software

\pkg
NOTE
Data is saved in the \pkg folder only when the NE
software is upgraded. Otherwise, keep the folder
empty.

Patch

\patch

Script

\script

USB authentication certificate

Root directory
NOTE
The RTN.CER file stores the administrator
accounts and passwords. The passwords are
encrypted in PBKDF2 format. This file is
generated using a special-purpose tool.

Device type

\devtype

----End

2.4 Determining the Commissioning Method


According to the scale of a microwave transmission network, commissioning engineers can use
the single-hop commissioning method or system commissioning method.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

22

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

Context
NOTE

In the following instructions for both types of commissioning methods, site commissioning and system
commissioning are defined as follows:
l Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one microwave link hop and the sites at both ends of the
hop. Site commissioning is carried out with commissioning tools connected to the NE at a single site.
l System commissioning refers to the commissioning and configuring of all NEs on a network. System
commissioning is carried out with commissioning tools connected to a gateway NE.

Single-Hop Commissioning
Single-hop commissioning is preferred for small-scale microwave transmission networks (for
example, a network with only one or two microwave link hops). By performing single-hop
commissioning, you can complete all site and system commissioning tasks at one time. The
major steps are outlined as follows:
1.

On both ends of a microwave link, power on the equipment.

2.

Load commissioning data using a USB flash drive or configure commissioning data
using the Web LCT.

3.

Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.

4.

Use the Web LCT to complete the system commissioning items.

System Commissioning
System commissioning is usually carried out for large-scale microwave transmission networks.
The major steps are outlined as follows:
1.

Power on the equipment.

2.

Load commissioning data using a USB flash drive or configure commissioning data
using the Web LCT.

3.

Use the Web LCT to complete the site commissioning items.

4.

Use the U2000 to complete the system commissioning items at the site where services
converge.

2.5 Checking Commissioning Conditions


Ensure that the equipment meets the requirements for site commissioning or system
commissioning prior to performing any commissioning tasks.
2.5.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions
Before performing site commissioning, ensure that the site and weather conditions meet the
requirements for site commissioning.
2.5.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions
Before performing system commissioning, ensure that the equipment and weather meet the
requirements for system commissioning.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

23

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

2 Commissioning Preparations

2.5.1 Checking Site Commissioning Conditions


Before performing site commissioning, ensure that the site and weather conditions meet the
requirements for site commissioning.

Context
The requirements are listed as follows:
l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

Power is available for the equipment.

Service signal cables have been properly routed.

Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and
the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.

There are no adverse weather conditions (such as strong wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could
hinder or affect commissioning.

2.5.2 Checking System Commissioning Conditions


Before performing system commissioning, ensure that the equipment and weather meet the
requirements for system commissioning.

Context
The requirements are listed as follows:
l

Site commissioning at both ends of a microwave link has been completed.

Data communication network (DCN) communication on the microwave transmission


network is normal.

There are no adverse weather conditions (such as strong wind, rain, snow, or fog) that could
hinder or affect commissioning.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

24

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Commissioning Process

About This Chapter


Based on the objects to be commissioned, commissioning involves two stages: site
commissioning and system commissioning.
3.1 Site Commissioning Process (Without 1+1 Protection)
Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one radio link hop and the sites at both ends
of the hop. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work
properly. Site commissioning is a preparation for system commissioning.
3.2 Site Commissioning Procedure (with 1+1 Protection)
For sites configured with 1+1 protection, the commissioning procedure is different.
3.3 System Commissioning Process
System commissioning refers to the commissioning of an entire microwave transmission
network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and
protection is implemented across the network.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

25

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

3.1 Site Commissioning Process (Without 1+1 Protection)


Site commissioning refers to the commissioning of one radio link hop and the sites at both ends
of the hop. Site commissioning ensures that the sites and the radio link between the sites work
properly. Site commissioning is a preparation for system commissioning.
You can use the following tools to configure site without 1+1 protection commissioning data
for OptiX RTN 380:
l

USB flash drive

Web LCT

Site Commissioning Items (Using a USB Flash Drive to Configure Data)


Engineers can configure site commissioning data using a USB flash drive onsite if they:
l

Are familiar with the radio link plan for the target sites.

Have a USB flash drive that contains the NE commissioning data.

Have a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Table 3-1 Configuring site commissioning data using a USB flash drive
Commissioning Item

Remarks

Powering on the Equipment

Required.

Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive

Required.

Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment

Required.

Creating NEs Using the Search Method

Required.

Checking Alarms

Required.

Aligning Single-Polarized Antennasa

Required when radio services


are transmitted by singlepolarized antennas.

Checking the Radio Link Status and Receive Power

Required.

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data at both ends
of the radio link.

Site Commissioning Items (Using the Web LCT to Configure Data)


Engineers can configure site commissioning data using the Web LCT onsite if they:
l

Are familiar with how to configure radio link data on OptiX RTN 380.

Are familiar with the radio link plan for the target sites.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

26

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Have a laptop on which the Web LCT is installed.

Commissioning Item

Remarks

Powering on the Equipment

Required.

Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment

Required.

Creating NEs Using the Search Method

Required.

Configuring Site Commissioning Data or Delivering a


Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using the Web LCT

Required.

Checking Alarms

Required.

Aligning Single-Polarized Antennasa

Required.

Checking the Radio Link Status and Receive Power

Required.

NOTE

a: Before aligning antennas, power on the equipment and configure site commissioning data at both ends
of the radio link.

3.2 Site Commissioning Procedure (with 1+1 Protection)


For sites configured with 1+1 protection, the commissioning procedure is different.
NOTE

Sites configured with 1+1 protection only support configuration of commissioning data using the Web LCT,
and do not support configuration of commissioning data using a USB flash drive or delivery of commissioning
data scripts using the Web LCT.

Site Commissioning Items (Configuring Commissioning Data Using the Web LCT)
Commissioning engineers can configure commissioning data using the Web LCT on site when:
l

The commissioning engineers are familiar with the microwave link data plan for target
sites.

The commissioning engineers have a laptop on which the Web LCT has been installed.

Site commissioning can be performed according to Figure 3-1 or Figure 3-2 depending on the
number of data configuration engineers responsible for configuring 1+1 protection at both sites.
NOTE

l Antenna alignment engineers align antennas, activate radio links, and turn over the subsequent
commissioning to the data configuration engineers responsible for configuring 1+1 protection.
l The data configuration engineers responsible for configuring 1+1 protection completes the configuration of
1+1 protection.
l An engineer familiar with site commissioning can align antennas and configure 1+1 protection on himself/
herself.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

27

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Figure 3-1 Coordinately configuring 1+1 protection for sites at both ends
Near-end site

Far-end site
Main

Main

LAG

LAG

LAG

LAG

Web LCT

Antenna
LAG

Web LCT

Antenna
LAG

Standby

Standby

E-LAG
Antenna alignment
engineer

E-LAG

Data configuration
engineer responsible for
configuring 1+1 protection
Active NE

Antenna alignment
engineer
Standby NE

Active NE
1

Power on the
equipment.

2 Configure site
commissioning
data.

Change an NE ID.

Change an NE ID.

Configure NE
communication
parameters.

Align antennas

Check the status


and receive power
of the active
microwave link.

Configure OSPF
parameters.

Synchronize NE time.
7

Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

Configure site
commissioning
parameters.

Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

No operation

11
Check alarms.

Configure NE
communication data.

Change an NE
name.

Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

Power on the
equipment.
Configure site
commissioning
data.

Synchronize NE
time.
Check alarms.

12
Check the status and
receive power of the
microwave links.

9.2

Change an NE ID.
Configure NE
communication
parameters.

Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

If an optical splitter is
9.1
used to form 1+1
Configure a LAG
protection, this step does
for 1+1 protection.
not need to be performed.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Synchronizing Data on
Active and Standby NEs in a
1+1 Protection Group

Required

Change an NE ID.

Configure OSPF
parameters.

10

Optional

Synchronize NE
time.

Configure the VLAN


ID and bandwidth for
inband DCN.

Configure a 1+1
protection group.

11

Check the status


and receive power
of the active
microwave link.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Power on the
equipment.

If an optical splitter is used 9.1


to form 1+1 protection, this
Configure a LAG for
step does not need to be
1+1 protection.
performed.
9.2

Align antennas
5

Configure OSPF
parameters.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Configure site
commissioning
data.

Configure the VLAN


ID and bandwidth for
inband DCN.

Power on the
equipment.

Check alarms.

Change an NE
name.

Change an NE name.
Configure the VLAN ID
and bandwidth for
inband DCN.

Standby NE

Configure NE
communication
parameters.

Check alarms.

Data configuration engineer


responsible for configuring
1+1 protection

Change an NE
name.
Configure the VLAN ID
and bandwidth for
inband DCN.
Configure OSPF
parameters.

Configure a 1+1
protection group.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

10

Synchronizing Data on
Active and Standby NEs in a
1+1 Protection Group
11

Check alarms.

11

Synchronize NE
time.
Check alarms.

12
Check the status
and receive power
of the microwave
links.

For sites at both ends of a link, perform the following simultaneously:


1.

Power on the active equipment according to Powering on the Equipment and keep the
standby equipment in the off status.

2.

Configure commissioning data for the active equipment according to Configuring Site
Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1 protection group (or the
link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).

3.

Check alarms on the active equipment according to Checking Alarms.

4.

Align single-polarized antennas according to Aligning Antennas to activate microwave


links between the active equipment.

5.

Check the status and receive power of the microwave link between the active equipment
according to Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power.

6.

Power on the standby equipment according to Powering on the Equipment.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

28

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

7.

Configuring Commissioning Data for the standby NE and data for active IF 1+1
protection group data (and the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the
protection involves LAG).

8.

5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group.

9.

Check alarms on the active and standby equipment according to Checking Alarms.

10. Check the status and receive power of microwave links according to Checking the
Microwave Link Status and Receive Power.
Figure 3-2 Independently configuring 1+1 protection for the near-end site
Near-end site

Far-end site
Main

Main

LAG

LAG

LAG

LAG

Web LCT

Antenna
LAG

Web LCT

Antenna
LAG
Standby

Standby

E-LAG

E-LAG

Antenna alignment
engineer

Antenna alignment
engineer

Active NE
1

Standby NE

Active NE
1

Power on the
equipment.

Change an NE ID.

Configure site
commissioning
data.

Configure NE
communication
parameters.

Change an NE ID.
Configure NE
communication
parameters.

3
Check alarms.

Change an NE
name.

Standby NE

Power on the
equipment.

Configure site
commissioning
data.

3
Check alarms.

Change an NE
name.
4

Configure the VLAN ID


and bandwidth for
inband DCN.
Configure OSPF
parameters.

Align antennas
5

Configure OSPF
parameters.

5
Check the status
and receive power
of the active
microwave link.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Configure the VLAN


ID and bandwidth for
inband DCN.

Align antennas

Check the status


and receive power
of the active
microwave link.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Synchronize NE
time.

Synchronize NE
time.

7
The data configuration
engineers responsible for
configuring 1+1 protection
configure the following for sites
at both ends using DCN at the
near end.

Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

Power on the
equipment.

Configure site
commissioning
data.

Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

Change an NE ID.
Configure NE
communication
parameters.
Change an NE
name.

If an optical splitter is used


9.1
to form 1+1 protection, this
Configure a LAG
step does not need to be
for 1+1 protection.
performed.

Configure the VLAN


ID and bandwidth for
inband DCN.

9.2
Configure a 1+1
protection group.

Configure OSPF
parameters.

10

Lock the 1+1


protection group of
the active devices to
the active unit.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.
Synchronize NE
time.

11
Change an NE ID.

13

Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

12 Configure site
commissioning
data.
13
Deleting an E-LAN
Service or Deleting
an E-Line Service

If an optical splitter is used 14.1


to form 1+1 protection, this
Configure a LAG
step does not need to be
for 1+1 protection.
performed.

Synchronizing Data on
Active and Standby NEs in a
1+1 Protection Group

Configure NE
communication
parameters.
Change an NE
name.
Configure the VLAN
ID and bandwidth for
inband DCN.
Configure OSPF
parameters.

14.2
Configure a 1+1
protection group.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Lock the 1+1


protection group of the
active devices to the
active unit.

Synchronize NE
time.

15

15

Synchronizing Data on
Active and Standby NEs in a
1+1 Protection Group
16 Check alarms.

Required
Optional
No operation

16

Check alarms.

16
Check alarms.

17
Check the status
and receive power
of the microwave
links.

18

18

Clear forced
switchover
command.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

16

17
Check the status
and receive power
of the microwave
links.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Check alarms.

Clear forced
switchover
command.

29

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

1.

Power on the active equipment at both ends according to Powering on the Equipment and
keep the standby equipment in the off status.

2.

Configure commissioning data for the active equipment at both ends according to
Configuring Site Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1
protection group (or the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection
involves LAG).

3.

Check alarms on the active equipment at both ends according to Checking Alarms.

4.

Align single-polarized antennas according to Aligning Antennas to activate microwave


links between the active equipment.

5.

Check the status and receive power of the microwave link between the active equipment
according to Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power.

6.

Power on the standby equipment on the far end according to Powering on the
Equipment.

7.

Configure commissioning data for the active equipment at far end according to
Configuring Site Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1
protection group (or the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection
involves LAG).

8.

Configure IF 1+1 protection group data for the active NE on the far end (and the link
aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).

9.

5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group on
the far end.

10. Forcibly switch the 1+1 protection group of active NEs to the active unit according to
Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching.

11. Power on the standby equipment on the near end according to Powering on the
Equipment.
12. Configure commissioning data for the active equipment at near end according to
Configuring Site Commissioning Data. At this time, do not configure the IF 1+1
protection group (or the link aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection
involves LAG).
13. Configure IF 1+1 protection group data for the active NE on the near end (and the link
aggregation group used for 1+1 protection if the protection involves LAG).
14. 5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group on
the near end.
15. Forcibly switch the 1+1 protection group of active NEs to work at the active unit according
to Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

30

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

16. Check alarms on the active and standby equipment according to Checking Alarms.
17. Check the status and receive power of microwave links according to Checking the
Microwave Link Status and Receive Power.
18. Clear forced switchover commands for the main equipment at the near end and the far end
according to Microwave 1+1 Protection Switching

3.3 System Commissioning Process


System commissioning refers to the commissioning of an entire microwave transmission
network. System commissioning ensures that various services are transmitted properly and
protection is implemented across the network.
Table 3-2 System commissioning items
Commissioning Item

Remarks

6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data

Required.

6.2 Testing Ethernet


Services

6.2.1 Testing Ethernet


Services Configured on a
Per NE Basis

Required when Ethernet


services are configured on a
per NE basis.

6.2.2 Testing Ethernet


Services Configured in
End-to-End Mode

Required when Ethernet


services are configured in
end-to-end mode.

6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Required.

31

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3 Commissioning Process

Commissioning Item
6.5 Testing Protection
Switching

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Remarks
Testing ERPS Switching

Required.

6.5.2 Testing 1+1


Protection Switching

Required when a microwave


link with 1+1 protection is
configured.

6.6 Checking the Clock Status

Required.

6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link

Optional.

6.8 Testing Ethernet


Service Performance

6.8.1 Testing the Latency,


Throughput, and Packet
Loss Ratio

Required.

6.8.2 Testing the Long-term


Packet Loss Ratio

Required.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

32

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash


Drive to Configure Data)

About This Chapter


Site commissioning using a USB flash drive is highly efficient. Prior to site commissioning using
this method, ensure that configuration data stored in the USB flash drive is correct.

Context
The commissioning process is as follows:
4.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380
You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the
equipment power-on process.
4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive
When you load commissioning data from a USB flash drive to an NE, the NE software is
upgraded simultaneously.
4.3 Using the Web LCT to Complete Subsequent Commissioning Items
The specific commissioning steps are the same as those in the scenario where the entire
commissioning process is performed using the Web LCT.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

33

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

4.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380


You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the
equipment power-on process.

Context
NOTE

l Power on the equipment within 24 hours of unpacking.


l During maintenance, the power-off time of the equipment cannot be longer than 24 hours.

4.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)


This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify
whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process.
4.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)
OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other
power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to
which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which
power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.

4.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)


This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify
whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process.

Prerequisites
l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

The power supply is available. The voltage, polarity, and fuse capacity of the power supply
are correct.

The power supply (for example, the cabinet power distribution box) is switched off.

Power cable connections are correct. The polarity is not reversed.

Context
Table 4-1 lists the fuse capacity recommended for OptiX RTN 380.
Table 4-1 Fuse capacity
Chassis

Recommended Fuse Capacity

OptiX RTN 380

6A

NOTE

The fuse capacity ranges from 6 A to 12 A in practice.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

34

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Precaution

NOTICE
l If the output power voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not
switch on the power supply and propose corresponding rectification suggestions.
l If any power cable connection is incorrect, rectify the connection before power-on.
Otherwise, the circuit breaker on the power distribution box will be disconnected and even
the power cable may be burnt.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect to the power supply.

P&E

P&E

GE

NMS

MGMT

P&E

Step 2 Verify that the outdoor network cable and PI power cable are correctly connected. Connect the
PI to the power supply and observe the PI indicators.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

35

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

GE

NMS

MGMT

P&E

Power supply equipment


Blue: -48 V
Black: 0 V ground cable

(-)
(+)

Normally, the DC IN and P&E OUT indicators on the PI should be steady green.
NOTE

l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator blinks green, check whether the outdoor
network cable or OptiX RTN 380 is short-circuited.
l If the DC IN indicator is steady green and the P&E OUT indicator is off, check whether the outdoor network
cable or PI is faulty.

Step 3 Observe the system indicator on OptiX RTN 380 to check whether the NE is successfully
powered on.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

36

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Normally, the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 should be steady green.
NOTE

If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the microwave link, the outdoor network cable or
OptiX RTN 380 is faulty.

----End

4.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)


OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other
power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to
which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which
power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.

Prerequisites
l

Hardware installation has been completed for an OptiX RTN 380 and has passed
acceptance.

The Dock has been powered on and has passed acceptance.

Procedure
Step 1 Use an outdoor GE network cable to connect the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN
port of the Dock. Power on the OptiX RTN 380.

NOTE

If a site has two OptiX RTN 380s in different directions, connect the P&E port of the other OptiX RTN 380 to
the LAN1 port of the Dock. Then, power on the other OptiX RTN 380. By default, the OptiX RTN 380 whose
P&E port is connected to the WAN port of the Dock traces the clock of the OptiX RTN 380 whose P&E port is
connected to the LAN1 port of the Dock.

Step 2 Observe the STAT indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 to check whether it is successfully powered
on.
Normally, the STAT indicator on the cover of the maintenance compartment should be steady
green.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

37

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

NOTE

l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment is red, check whether the outdoor GE network
cable connects the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN port of the Dock properly or whether
the OptiX RTN 380 is running properly.
l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment blinks red about every 1s, check whether the
microwave link is interrupted.

----End

4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash Drive


When you load commissioning data from a USB flash drive to an NE, the NE software is
upgraded simultaneously.

Prerequisites
l

The equipment has been powered on and is running properly. (If the equipment is powered
on for the first time or if the equipment is powered off and then powered on again, wait 3
minutes before you load commissioning data using a USB flash drive.)

Commissioning data has been loaded to a USB flash drive.

The certificate file on the USB flash drive is correct.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


USB flash drive

Procedure
Step 1 Power on the equipment and open the maintenance compartment.
Step 2 Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port. Remove the Wi-FI module if it has been inserted
into the USB port.

Step 3 Check the data loading status by observing the USB indicator.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

38

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

USB Indicator Status

Data Loading Status

Follow-up Operation

The indicator blinks green,


turns off, blinks green again,
and turns steady green.

Loading data is successful.

Remove the USB flash drive,


connect the Wi-Fi module to
the USB port, and close the
maintenance compartment.

NOTE
l When the indicator is
blinking green, do not
remove the USB flash
drive. Otherwise, the data
loading is interrupted.
l If both script files and
software package are
loaded using the USB flash
drive, the loading may take
more than 10 minutes.

The indicator turns off after


the USB flash drive is
inserted into the USB port.

The USB indicator blinks


red.

The USB flash drive is faulty


and fails to go online.
NOTE
Another possible cause is that
the USB flash drive is not
properly inserted.

The model of the USB flash


drive is incorrect, or an error
occurs when the NE attempts
to read/write the USB flash
drive.
NOTE
For the USB flash drive models
supported by OptiX RTN 380,
see 2.3 Preparing a USB Flash
Drive.

The indicator is steady red.

The loaded data is abnormal.

l Copy the commissioning


data to another qualified
USB flash drive.
l Perform Step 2 again to
load the commissioning
data.
l Copy the commissioning
data to another USB flash
drive.
l Perform Step 2 again to
load the commissioning
data.

Handle the fault by following


instructions in 7.1 Handling
a Fault in Commissioning
Script Loading Using a
USB Flash Drive.

----End

4.3 Using the Web LCT to Complete Subsequent


Commissioning Items
The specific commissioning steps are the same as those in the scenario where the entire
commissioning process is performed using the Web LCT.

Prerequisites
l
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

The OptiX RTN 380 has been powered on.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

39

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

4 Site Commissioning (Using a USB Flash Drive to


Configure Data)

Commissioning data has been downloaded from a USB flash disk to the NE.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Procedure
Step 1 At one end of the radio link, 5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link.
Step 2 5.6 Checking Alarms.
Step 3 5.7 Aligning Antennas.
Step 4 5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

40

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to


Configure Data)

About This Chapter


Site commissioning using the Web LCT requires that commissioning engineers be capable of
configuring NE data.

Context
The commissioning process is as follows:
5.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380
You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the
equipment power-on process.
5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment
Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring
commissioning data for the equipment.
5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method
The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.
5.4 Delivering a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using the Web LCT
This section describes how to deliver a commissioning data script to an NE using the Web LCT.
The function is available when a site commissioning data script has been prepared. With this
function, onsite configuration is not required.
5.5 Configuring Site Commissioning Data
During site commissioning, you do not need to configure Ethernet service data. By default, the
NE creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service for
transmitting Ethernet services.
5.6 Checking Alarms
Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is
functioning properly.
5.7 Aligning Antennas
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

41

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment
has a direct effect on microwave link performance.
5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power
After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether
the receive power meets requirements.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

42

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

5.1 Powering On OptiX RTN 380


You can verify whether the hardware system and power system are functional by observing the
equipment power-on process.

Context
NOTE

l Power on the equipment within 24 hours of unpacking.


l During maintenance, the power-off time of the equipment cannot be longer than 24 hours.

5.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)


This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify
whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process.
5.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)
OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other
power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to
which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which
power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.

5.1.1 Powering on OptiX RTN 380 (with a PI)


This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 with an indoor PI. You can verify
whether the OptiX RTN 380 and indoor PI are functional by observing the equipment poweron process.

Prerequisites
l

Hardware installation has been completed and has passed the installation check.

The power supply is available. The voltage, polarity, and fuse capacity of the power supply
are correct.

The power supply (for example, the cabinet power distribution box) is switched off.

Power cable connections are correct. The polarity is not reversed.

Context
Table 5-1 lists the fuse capacity recommended for OptiX RTN 380.
Table 5-1 Fuse capacity
Chassis

Recommended Fuse Capacity

OptiX RTN 380

6A

NOTE

The fuse capacity ranges from 6 A to 12 A in practice.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

43

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Precaution

NOTICE
l If the output power voltage of the power supply does not meet test requirements, do not
switch on the power supply and propose corresponding rectification suggestions.
l If any power cable connection is incorrect, rectify the connection before power-on.
Otherwise, the circuit breaker on the power distribution box will be disconnected and even
the power cable may be burnt.

Procedure
Step 1 Connect to the power supply.

P&E

P&E

GE

NMS

MGMT

P&E

Step 2 Verify that the outdoor network cable and PI power cable are correctly connected. Connect the
PI to the power supply and observe the PI indicators.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

44

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

GE

NMS

MGMT

P&E

Power supply equipment


Blue: -48 V
Black: 0 V ground cable

(-)
(+)

Normally, the DC IN and P&E OUT indicators on the PI should be steady green.
NOTE

l If the DC IN indicator is steady green but the P&E OUT indicator blinks green, check whether the outdoor
network cable or OptiX RTN 380 is short-circuited.
l If the DC IN indicator is steady green and the P&E OUT indicator is off, check whether the outdoor network
cable or PI is faulty.

Step 3 Observe the system indicator on OptiX RTN 380 to check whether the NE is successfully
powered on.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

45

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Normally, the system indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 should be steady green.
NOTE

If the system indicator is steady red, check whether the microwave link, the outdoor network cable or
OptiX RTN 380 is faulty.

----End

5.1.2 Powering on Equipment (Power Supplied by a PSE)


OptiX RTN 380 supports power supply by a Dock, the EG4P board of an IDU 900, or other
power sourcing equipment (PSE). This section describes how to power on OptiX RTN 380 to
which power is supplied by a Dock. The procedure for powering on OptiX RTN 380 to which
power is supplied by other PSEs is similar.

Prerequisites
l

Hardware installation has been completed for an OptiX RTN 380 and has passed
acceptance.

The Dock has been powered on and has passed acceptance.

Procedure
Step 1 Use an outdoor GE network cable to connect the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN
port of the Dock. Power on the OptiX RTN 380.

NOTE

If a site has two OptiX RTN 380s in different directions, connect the P&E port of the other OptiX RTN 380 to
the LAN1 port of the Dock. Then, power on the other OptiX RTN 380. By default, the OptiX RTN 380 whose
P&E port is connected to the WAN port of the Dock traces the clock of the OptiX RTN 380 whose P&E port is
connected to the LAN1 port of the Dock.

Step 2 Observe the STAT indicator on the OptiX RTN 380 to check whether it is successfully powered
on.
Normally, the STAT indicator on the cover of the maintenance compartment should be steady
green.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

46

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

NOTE

l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment is red, check whether the outdoor GE network
cable connects the P&E port of the OptiX RTN 380 and the WAN port of the Dock properly or whether
the OptiX RTN 380 is running properly.
l If the STAT indicator on the maintenance compartment blinks red about every 1s, check whether the
microwave link is interrupted.

----End

5.2 Connecting the Web LCT to the Equipment


Properly connecting the Web LCT to the equipment is a prerequisite for configuring
commissioning data for the equipment.

Prerequisites
OptiX RTN 380s have been powered on.
The Wi-Fi module is normal.
NOTE

After you load commissioning data using a USB flash drive and establish the DCN, you need to connect the
Web LCT to only one end of a microwave link hop. Then, the entire microwave link hop can be commissioned.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT (Win7 operating system)

Background Information
This section describes how to connect the OptiX RTN 380 to the Web LCT through Wi-Fi. If
the Wi-Fi module is abnormal, connect the OptiX RTN 380 to the Web LCT through the Ethernet
network management interface or through the Ethernet network management interface of an NE
that communicates with the OptiX RTN 380 through the DCN. The IP address of the Ethernet
ports on the computer that houses the Web LCT must be in the same network segment as the
NE IP address. The two IP addresses must be different.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

47

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Figure 5-1 Ways for connecting the Web LCT to an OptiX RTN 380

P&E

Wi-Fi module

(((

RSSI/NMS

NMS/COM

4/P2

(((

Wi-Fi

EG4P

Networking with OptiX RTN 900

NOTE

l If a site has several cascaded OptiX RTN 380s, connect the laptop to only one of the OptiX RTN 380s. Other
OptiX RTN 380s can be connected through the internal DCN. If the a GE electrical interface is set as the
NMS interface, it can be connected to the Web LCT.
l Use either a crossover cable or a straight-through cable to connect the laptop to the OptiX RTN 380. For
the wire sequences of crossover cables and straight-through cables, see Cable in the OptiX RTN 380
Microwave Transmission System Product Description.

Procedure
Step 1 Start the laptop and log in to the operating system.
Step 2 Use the Wi-Fi Connection tool delivered with the Web LCT to set up a Wi-Fi connection between
the laptop and NE.
1.

Access the Wi-Fi Connection tool directory (such as WebLCT\weblct\tools\wificonn) and


run WifiConnection.exe.

2.

Select the SSID of the NE to set up a Wi-Fi connection.


l The default SSID is EMn-The last six digits of a MAC address in hexadecimal
format-NE ID.
l Default password: Modify_123.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

48

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Right-click it.
1
2

After the connection is set up, the


connection status of the related NE
becomes "Connected".

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

49

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

NOTE

l If the Wi-Fi Connection tool does not find the SSID of the NE, perform the following operations:
l Check whether there is a block between the laptop and the NE.
l Check whether the distance between the laptop and NE is longer than the typical Wi-Fi
transmission distance. (The typical transmission distance between the Wi-Fi module and
laptop is 30m. An external Wi-Fi network adapter can be installed on the laptop to extend
the typical transmission distance to 70 m.)
l If the distance between the laptop and NE is shorter than the typical Wi-Fi transmission
distance, view the status of the Wi-Fi indicator in the maintenance compartment. If the WiFi indicator is red (indicating the abnormal state), replace the Wi-Fi module or connect the
laptop to the NMS port in the maintenance compartment to check the Wi-Fi configuration.
l Generally, it takes about 20s to set up connection through Wi-Fi, please be patient.
l If a Wi-Fi connection fails to be set up, check whether:
l The connection password is correct.
l The IP address is automatically allocated.
l Another laptop is connected to the NE though Wi-Fi. Only one device can access an NE
through Wi-Fi at a time. If another device needs to access the NE, it is recommended that
you use the Wi-Fi Connection tool to disconnect the first device and then access the second
device. The disconnection method is similar to the connection method.

After the Web LCT and the OptiX RTN 380 are properly connected, the indicator at the
Ethernet port of the laptop is steady green. A message is displayed indicating that the
network has established a local connection if the operating system has been configured to
do so.
Step 3 After the Wi-Fi connection is set up successfully, double-click the Start Web LCT icon on the
desktop.
The system displays the USER LOGIN window of the Web LCT.

Step 4 Set User Name, Password, and Verification Code, and click Login.
l User Name: admin
l Password: Changeme_123
NOTE

At the first login to the Web LCT, change the password as prompted.

If the entered user name and password are correct, the NE List page is displayed.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

50

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If you cannot access the USER LOGIN window or the NE List page, configure the Internet
Explorer using the following method:

5.3 Creating NEs Using the Search Method


The search method is generally used to create an NE during site commissioning.

Prerequisites
l

The Web LCT is communicating properly with NEs.

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

If the NE connection mode is SSL or Normal+SSL (default), and NEs connect to the Web
LCT through Wi-Fi, NEs are accessed using the SSL protocol. If the NEs connect to the
Web LCT through an Ethernet cable, it is also recommended to use the SSL protocol.

Follow the following steps to replace the SSL certificate if it is not matched.
Delete the WebLCT\conf\certificate directory on the Web LCT.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

51

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Copy the server\etc\ssl\nemanager\default directory on the U2000 to the path WebLCT


\conf on the Web LCT. Rename default to certificate. Note that the installation path on
the Web LCT should not contain Chinese characters, spaces, or special characters.
Restart the Web LCT.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure:
l

Searches for NEs using the Search by user port method if the NEs are connected directly
to the Web LCT using Wi-Fi.

Searches for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the
Web LCT using Ethernet cables.

Searches for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs, and are
connected directly to the Web LCT using LAN.
NOTE

The default user name for NE Login: lct.


The default password for NE Login: password.

Procedure
Step 1 Searches for NEs using the Search by user port method if the NEs are connected directly to
the Web LCT using Wi-Fi.

Step 2 Search for NEs using the NE Search method if the NEs are connected directly to the Web LCT
using Ethernet cables.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

52

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Step 3 Search for NEs using the IP auto discovery method if the site has multiple NEs.

----End

5.4 Delivering a Commissioning Data Script to an NE Using


the Web LCT
This section describes how to deliver a commissioning data script to an NE using the Web LCT.
The function is available when a site commissioning data script has been prepared. With this
function, onsite configuration is not required.

Prerequisites
l

The equipment has been connected to the Web LCT.

The commissioning data script for the site has been prepared.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

53

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Procedure
Step 1 Deliver a commissioning data script.
NOTE

By default, "User Name" is "szhw" and "Password" is "nesoft".

----End

5.5 Configuring Site Commissioning Data


During site commissioning, you do not need to configure Ethernet service data. By default, the
NE creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service for
transmitting Ethernet services.
5.5.1 Changing an NE ID
Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This
task does not interrupt services.
5.5.2 Changing an NE Name
For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical
location or the device to which it is connected.
5.5.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN
The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from
the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements
of the transmission network for managing messages.
5.5.4 Deleting an E-LAN Service
If 1+1 protection must be configured for links of an NE, the default E-LAN services of the NE
must be deleted, to release the cascade ports occupied by the services.
5.5.5 Creating a LAG
If links must be configured with 1+1 protection based on E-LAG, the access ports must be added
into an E-LAG.
5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

54

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

By performing this task, you can set the basic attributes for the local NE and the peer NE on a
single hop of microwave link.
5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1 Protection Group
This section describes how to synchronize data of an active NE to its standby NE.

5.5.1 Changing an NE ID
Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This
task does not interrupt services.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure changes an NE ID to the planned value listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

New ID

320

After changing the NE ID, you need to log in to the NE again.

Procedure
Step 1

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

55

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

5.5.2 Changing an NE Name


For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical
location or the device to which it is connected.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure changes an NE name to the planned value listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Name

Site2-1

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.5.3 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN


The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from
the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements
of the transmission network for managing messages.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

56

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure sets the VLAN ID and bandwidth to the planned values listed in the
following table for an inband DCN.
Parameter

Value

VLAN ID

4092

Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

1000Kbit/s

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.5.4 Deleting an E-LAN Service


If 1+1 protection must be configured for links of an NE, the default E-LAN services of the NE
must be deleted, to release the cascade ports occupied by the services.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

57

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Context
The following steps delete default E-LAN services of an NE.

Procedure
Step 1

NOTE

Confirm the deletion in the displayed confirmation dialog box.

----End

5.5.5 Creating a LAG


If links must be configured with 1+1 protection based on E-LAG, the access ports must be added
into an E-LAG.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure:
l

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 protection according to the planned parameter values
listed in the following table.
Parameter

NE

LAG No.

Assign Automatically (default value).

LAG Name

LAG_02

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

58

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Parameter

NE

LAG type

Static (default value)

Load sharing type

Non-load sharing (default value)

LAG priority for the main NE

32768 (default value)

Main port

GE(o)

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.5.6 Configuring a Single Hop of Microwave Link


By performing this task, you can set the basic attributes for the local NE and the peer NE on a
single hop of microwave link.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The sites at the two ends of a microwave link hop are communicating properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

59

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

The planned parameter values are listed in the following table.


Parameter

Link

Link ID

IF Channel Bandwidth

250MHz

AMAC

Disabled

Modulation Mode

16QAM

TX Frequency(MHz)

73500

T/R Spacing (MHz)

10000

ATPC

Disabled

TX power (dBm)

10

Power to Be Frequency(dBm)

-40

TX Status

unmute

Antenna Polarization

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.5.7 Synchronizing Data on Active and Standby NEs in a 1+1


Protection Group
This section describes how to synchronize data of an active NE to its standby NE.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

60

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

An IF 1+1 protection group has been created.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Background Information
The following steps synchronize data from an active NE to its standby NE.

Procedure
Step 1

----End

5.6 Checking Alarms


Checking alarms generated by equipment helps you to determine whether the equipment is
functioning properly.

Prerequisites
l

The Web LCT has been connected to the equipment.

Basic data has been configured for the equipment.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

61

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Context
The following procedure checks the alarms on an NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Check alarms.

----End

5.7 Aligning Antennas


Antenna alignment is the most important activity in site commissioning, as antenna alignment
has a direct effect on microwave link performance.
5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes
Before aligning antennas, engineers must be familiar with the following concepts regarding the
main lobe and side lobes.
5.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas
When aligning single-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and
elevation of the antennas at both ends.

5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes


Before aligning antennas, engineers must be familiar with the following concepts regarding the
main lobe and side lobes.

Definition
The electric field strength of the radiated power of an antenna varies in space. The differences
of the power distribution can be shown in an azimuth diagram. Generally, there are two azimuth
diagrams illustrating the horizontal and vertical sections. These are the horizontal azimuth
diagram and vertical azimuth diagram. Figure 5-2 is a vertical azimuth diagram showing many
lobes. The lobe with the strongest radiated power is the main lobe, while the others are side
lobes. The first side lobe can be used for aligning the antenna.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

62

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Figure 5-2 Main lobe and side lobes

Main lobe
First side lobe
Second side lobe

Locating of the Main Lobe


Antenna alignment aligns the main lobe of the local antenna with the main lobe of the opposite
antenna, to achieve the maximum received signal strength at the opposite antenna.
The main lobe width of a microwave antenna is narrow, specifically, between 0.6 and 3.7. For
instance, in the case of a 1.2 m antenna at a working frequency of 23 GHz, the azimuth is only
0.9 when the signal level drops from the signal peak to zero. Once a signal is detected, very
small alignment adjustments are required to locate the main lobe.
Antenna movement across the main lobe results in a rapid rise and drop in the signal level.
Whether the main lobe is aligned properly can be verified by comparing the received signal
peaks. Typically, the main lobe signal peak is 20-25 dB higher than the first side lobe signal
peak.
Figure 5-3 shows the head-on view of a free-space model for radio propagation with concentric
rings of side lobe peaks and troughs radiating outward from the main lobe.
Figure 5-3 Horizontal section and front view of the antenna
180o

90o

0o

Center of the main lobe


Outer edge of the main lobe, 3 to
10 dB lower than the main lobe
Trough between the main lobe
and the first side lobe, 30 dB
lower than the main lobe
First side lobe, 20-25 dB
lower than the main lobe

180o

90o

0o
a Horizontal section
of the antenna

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

b Head-on
view

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trough between the first side lobe


and the second side lobe, 30 dB or
more lower than the main lobe
Second side lobe, where
signals are very weak

63

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tracking Path
Side lobe signal readings are sometimes mistaken for main lobe readings when signals are
tracked on different elevations (or azimuths). Figure 5-4 shows a horizontal radio propagation
model of an antenna, and signal levels at three different elevation positions (1-7 represent the
measured signal level values of the received signal strength indicator [RSSI] port of the OptiX
RTN 380).
Figure 5-4 Three tracking paths
Head-on view of tracking paths for
different elevations

Signal level for each path


6 7

C
B
A

C'

4
1

B'
3

C'

B'

A'

2
1
A

3
A'

Line AA' indicates that the main lobe of the antenna is almost aligned properly. The main
lobe is at point 2, and the first side lobes are at points 1 and 3. Slightly adjust the azimuth
of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

Line BB' indicates that the elevation of the antenna slightly deviates from the main lobe.
The signal peaks appear at points 4 and 5. The signal peak at point 4 is higher than the
signal peak at point 5 because of the antenna characteristics. As a result, point 4 may be
mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct method is to set the azimuth
of the antenna to the middle position between the two signal peaks. Then, adjust the
elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust the
elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

Line CC' indicates that the elevation of the antenna completely deviates from the main lobe
and is almost aligned with the first side lobe. The signal peak of the first side lobe at point
6 and the signal peak of the first side lobe at point 7 appear as one signal peak. As a result,
points 6 and 7 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main lobe signal. The correct
method is to set the azimuth of the antenna to the middle of points 6 and 7. Then, adjust
the elevation of the antenna until the three signal peaks of line AA' appear. Slightly adjust
the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at point 2 until the peak signal appears.

When the side lobe peak on one side is higher than the side lobe peak at the other side, as shown
in Figure 5-5, a common error is moving the antenna from left to right along line DD', or top
to bottom along line EE'. As a result, point 1 may be mistaken for the peak point of the main
lobe signal. The correct method is to adjust the elevation in the middle of points 1 and 2 or the
azimuth in the middle of points 1 and 3. Several adjustments are required to ensure that the three
signal peaks of line AA' can appear. Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth of the antenna at
point 2 as shown in Figure 5-4 until the peak signal appears.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

64

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Figure 5-5 Aligning the antenna with the first side lobe
E
1

D'

D
D'
1

E'

E'

5.7.2 Aligning Single-Polarized Antennas


When aligning single-polarized antennas, align the main lobes by adjusting the azimuth and
elevation of the antennas at both ends.

Prerequisites
l

The preceding site commissioning items have been completed at both ends of a microwave
link.

The weather conditions at both ends are suitable for outdoor operations, and there is no
threat of rain, snow, fog or other unfavorable conditions that could interfere with the
procedure.

Onsite conditions meet the requirements for antennas to work at their given heights, and
the commissioning personnel are trained to work at these heights.

A properly calibrated multimeter is available.

The automatic transmit power control (ATPC) function has been disabled (this function is
disabled by default).

The adaptive modulation (AM) function has been disabled (this function is disabled by
default).

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


l

Adjustable wrench

Interphone

Hex key (delivered with antennas)

North-stabilized indicator

Telescope

Multimeter

Received signal strength indicator (RSSI) test cables (delivered with OptiX RTN 380)

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

65

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

NOTICE
You can change the azimuth and elevation of the antennas by adjusting the nuts or screws. For
details, see the antenna installation guide. Steps provided in this section are for reference only.

Procedure
Step 1 Calculate the voltage value (VBNC) for the RSSI port corresponding to the planned received
signal level (RSL) based on the RSSI and RSL curves.
NOTE

The curve diagram for VBNC and RSL is delivered along with the OptiX RTN 380.

Step 2 Determine the azimuth of the antenna at the local end based on the installation position and
height of the antenna. Then, adjust the elevation of the antenna to the horizontal position.
NOTE

For a special microwave link (for example, a microwave link with one end on a mountain top and the other end
at the foot of the mountain), the inclination between the link and the horizontal line is greater than the half-power
angle of the antenna. Slightly adjust the elevation of the antenna so the main lobes are aligned vertically.

Step 3 Connect a multimeter to the RSSI port on the OptiX RTN 380 at the local end using an RSSI
test fiber and test the voltage value VBNC. Turn the multimeter to the DC power level with the
voltage value 20 V.
NOTE

It is recommended that you fix the multimeter to the tower with adhesive tape at your plain view, so that
you can observe the RSSI voltage value while aligning antennas.

Figure 5-6 Testing the RSSI voltage using a multimeter

Step 4 Adjust the azimuth and elevation of the antenna as follows:


Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

66

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

1.

Keep the remote antenna fixed.

2.

Loosen the antenna brackets, rotate the antenna horizontally within a large range, and
observe the value of VBNC on the multimeter. When the value is not 0, secure the antenna
brackets.

3.

Loosen the fine adjustment bolts, rotate the antenna horizontally, and observe the peak
values of VBNC on the multimeter.
Normally, three signal peaks are tracked, as shown in Figure 5-7.
Figure 5-7 Signal peaks
2
1

NOTICE
If the number of tracked signal peaks is fewer than three, even after a wide rotation and
careful observation of the multimeter, refer to 5.7.1 Main Lobe and Side Lobes for help
with handling the exception.
4.

Adjust the antenna azimuth until the signal strength reaches position 2 shown in Figure
5-7. When the signal strength is at position 2, the value of VBNC is the peak value.

5.

Slightly adjust the elevation and azimuth at point 2 until VBNC reaches the peak value within
the tracked range.

6.

Secure the antenna at the local end.


NOTE

When securing the antenna, ensure that VBNC remains at the peak value.

Step 5 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to adjust the antenna at the remote end. When VBNC reaches the peak
value, secure the antenna at the remote end.
Step 6 Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 for two to four times. When VBNC at the local end and VBNC at the
remote end reach the peak value, secure the antennas at both ends.
NOTE

l Perform slight adjustments in this step.


l After the adjustments are complete and antennas at both ends are secured, the VBNC value must reach or
exceed the VBNC value obtained in Step 1.

----End

5.8 Checking the Microwave Link Status and Receive Power


After antenna alignment, check whether the status of a microwave link is normal and whether
the receive power meets requirements.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

67

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

5 Site Commissioning (Using the Web LCT to Configure


Data)

Prerequisites
l

Antennas have been aligned.

The basic data of NEs on the entire network has been configured.

You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT

Context
The following procedure checks the microwave link status and receive power.

Procedure
Step 1 Check the microwave link status and receive power.

NOTE

If the receive power does not meet design requirements, handle the fault by following instructions in 7.2
Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the Design Requirements.

----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

68

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

System Commissioning

About This Chapter


This chapter describes the specific commissioning procedures for all system commissioning
items.
6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data
After site commissioning is performed for each hop of microwave link, data communication
network (DCN) communication between NEs is normal. Then, you can connect the U2000 to
an NE and configure network-wide service data.
6.2 Testing Ethernet Services
By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
microwave links. Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH OAM function, and no dedicated
tester is required.
6.3 Verifying CPRI Service Configurations
On OptiX RTN 380, pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) tests can be performed to verify
CPRI service configurations.
6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting
By simulating the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of received signals, you can determine whether
to trigger AMAC shifting on OptiX RTN 380.
6.5 Testing Protection Switching
If services on a microwave network are protected, you need to test typical protection schemes
to verify the protection switching function.
6.6 Checking the Clock Status
Checking the clock status for all NEs on a microwave transmission network ensures that the NE
clocks are synchronized.
6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link
The fade margin over a microwave link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors
(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).
6.8 Testing Ethernet Service Performance

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

69

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

This section describes how to test Ethernet service performance using the NE-inherent test
functions.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

70

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

6.1 Configuring Network-wide Service Data


After site commissioning is performed for each hop of microwave link, data communication
network (DCN) communication between NEs is normal. Then, you can connect the U2000 to
an NE and configure network-wide service data.

Context
NOTE

For details about how to configure network-wide service data, see 8 Configuring Networkwide Service
Data.

6.2 Testing Ethernet Services


By testing Ethernet services, you can check whether the Ethernet services are available over
microwave links. Ethernet services can be tested using the ETH OAM function, and no dedicated
tester is required.
6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis
To test Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis, you must create ETH OAM manually.
6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode
The ETH OAM that is automatically created by services can be used to test Ethernet services
configured in end-to-end mode.

6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services Configured on a Per NE Basis


To test Ethernet services configured on a per NE basis, you must create ETH OAM manually.

Prerequisites
Ethernet services have been configured.
NOTE

If the Ethernet services to be tested are low-priority services, it is recommended that you perform the test when
weather conditions are favorable and the microwave link works in the highest-order modulation scheme.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Test Connection Diagram


The following procedure uses the Ethernet services from P&E on NE 1 to P&E on NE 2 as an
example, as shown in Figure 6-1.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

71

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Figure 6-1 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services

Procedure
Step 1 Create an MD.

Step 2 Create an MA.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

72

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 3 Create an MEP.

Step 4 Create a remote MEP.

Step 5 Perform an LB test.


Perform an LB test by considering the MEP whose ID is 1 as the source MEP and the MEP
whose ID is 2 as the sink MEP.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

73

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful.


l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in
the following table.
Cause

Handling Procedure

Connecting to the peer end fails within the


specified period.

Check whether services are interrupted.

Packets are lost.

Check whether the service traffic is higher


than the transmission bandwidth.
Check the link for bit errors.

----End

6.2.2 Testing Ethernet Services Configured in End-to-End Mode


The ETH OAM that is automatically created by services can be used to test Ethernet services
configured in end-to-end mode.

Prerequisites
Ethernet services have been configured.
NOTE

If the Ethernet services to be tested are low-priority services, it is recommended that you perform the test when
weather conditions are favorable and the microwave link works in the highest-order modulation scheme.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

74

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Test Connection Diagram


The following procedure uses the Ethernet services from P&E port on NE 1 to P&E port on NE
2 as an example, as shown in Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-2 Connection diagram for testing Ethernet services

The following procedure:


1.

Verifies Ethernet line (E-Line) services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.

2.

Verifies Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services transmitted in Native Ethernet
mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Verify E-Line services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.

Step 2 Verify E-LAN services transmitted in Native Ethernet mode.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

75

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

----End

6.3 Verifying CPRI Service Configurations


On OptiX RTN 380, pseudo random binary sequence (PRBS) tests can be performed to verify
CPRI service configurations.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
For OptiX RTN 380, PRBS tests can be performed in the air interface direction and the CPRI
port direction.
The PRBS test in the air interface direction checks connectivity from the local baseband
processing unit to the peer CPRI port. Figure 6-3 shows the test connection diagram and
loopback location.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

76

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Figure 6-3 PRBS test in the air interface direction

The PRBS test in the CPRI port direction checks connectivity from the local baseband processing
unit to the local CPRI port. Figure 6-4 shows the test connection diagram and loopback location.
Figure 6-4 PRBS test in the CPRI port direction

NOTICE
l During a PRBS test, the services in the tested path are unavailable.
l If the NEs at both ends are connected to other devices, only a physical loopback can be
performed on the CPRI port. Other types of loopback may cause the PRBS frame to be
incorrectly transmitted to the downstream devices.
l If the NEs at both ends are not connected to other devices, an inloop rather a physical loopback
can be perform on the CPRI port.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

77

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Perform a loopback on the CPRI port of the peer NE. For details, see Figure 6-3.
Step 2 Configure a PRBS test in the air interface direction.

Step 3 Views the test result.

Step 4 Perform a loopback on the CPRI port of the local NE. For details, see Figure 6-4.
Step 5 Configure a PRBS test in the CPRI port direction.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

78

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 6 View the test result.

----End

6.4 Testing AMAC Shifting


By simulating the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of received signals, you can determine whether
to trigger AMAC shifting on OptiX RTN 380.

Prerequisites
l

Antennas have been aligned.

The adaptive modulation (AMAC) function has been enabled for the microwave link to be
tested.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

79

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Weather conditions are favorable.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


Web LCT
NOTE

The U2000 does not support this operation.

Context
The following procedure tests the AMAC shifting function on an NE.

Procedure
Step 1 Testing One-Touch AMAC Switching.

----End

6.5 Testing Protection Switching


If services on a microwave network are protected, you need to test typical protection schemes
to verify the protection switching function.
6.5.1 Testing ERPS Switching
You can verify the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) function by checking the port
status of the ERPS protection group before and after switching.
6.5.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching
You can verify the 1+1 protection functions by checking the changes of the main and standby
devices before and after switching.

6.5.1 Testing ERPS Switching


You can verify the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) function by checking the port
status of the ERPS protection group before and after switching.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

80

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Prerequisites
l

ERPS has been configured for OptiX RTN 380s on a ring network.

Ethernet links on the ring network are connected correctly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure queries the port status change on the ring protection link (RPL) owner
node in an ERPS protection group before and after switching to check whether the ERPS function
is running properly.

Test Connection Diagram


In Figure 6-5, the Ethernet services between NE 2 and NE 6 are protected by ERPS, and NE 2
is the RPL owner node.
Figure 6-5 Configuration for testing ERPS

Procedure
Step 1 Before switching, query the status of the ERPS protection group that is configured on NE 2.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

81

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 2 Test the availability of the Ethernet services. For details, see 6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services
Configured on a Per NE Basis.
The value of LossRate in Detection Result should be 0.
Step 3 Set TX Status to mute for NE 6.

Step 4 After switching, query the status of the ERPS protection group that is configured on NE 2.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

82

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 5 Test the availability of the Ethernet services. For details, see 6.2.1 Testing Ethernet Services
Configured on a Per NE Basis.
The value of LossRate in Detection Result should be 0.
Step 6 Set TX Status to unmute for NE 6.

----End

6.5.2 Testing 1+1 Protection Switching


You can verify the 1+1 protection functions by checking the changes of the main and standby
devices before and after switching.

Prerequisites
l

Antenna alignment has been completed.

Ethernet services and 1+1 protection have been configured.

Static link aggregation groups (LAGs) have been configured for third-party devices,when
the devices are connected without optical splitters.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

83

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Test Connection Diagram


When the optical splitters are not used ,the basic configurations are as follows:
l

Main OptiX RTN 380s: NE 11 and NE 12

Standby OptiX RTN 380s: NE 21 and NE 22


NOTE

The following configuration steps adopts all the 1+1 protection, and take the 1+1 HSB as an example.

Figure 6-6 Test connection diagram

The Ethernet services protected by 1+1 hot standby (HSB) between NE 11 and NE 12 shown in
Figure 6-6 are tested.
The same testing way can be used for the topology with optical splitters.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure Reversion Mode for the 1+1 HSB protection group on NE 11.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from Function Tree.

2.

In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and set Reversion Mode to NonRevertive.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click Close.

Step 2 Query the protection group status on NE 11 before switching.


1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from Function Tree.

2.

In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and click Query.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

84

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

3.

6 System Commissioning

Ensure that Active NE of Device in Protection Group is NE 11.

Step 3 Test availability of the tested Ethernet services before switching. For details, see 6.2 Testing
Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0.
Step 4 Cold reset NE 11.
1.

Optional: Double-click the subnet to which NE 11 belongs.

2.

Double-click NE 11 in Main Topology.


The NE panel is displayed.

3.

Select the MXUF4 board, right-click, and choose Cold Reset from the shortcut menu.
The Warning dialog box is displayed.

4.

Click OK.

Step 5 After NE 11 is cold reset (which takes about 3 minutes), query the protection group status on
NE 11.
1.

In NE Explorer, choose NE 11 from the object tree and choose Configuration > IF 1+1
Protection from Function Tree.

2.

In Protection Group, select the desired protection group and click Query.

3.

Ensure that Active NE of Device in Protection Group is NE 21.

Step 6 Test availability of the tested Ethernet services after switching. For details, see 6.2 Testing
Ethernet Services. The value of LossRate in Test Result should be 0, indicating that the 1+1
protection switching is successful.
Step 7 Restore Reversion Mode to the original value.
----End

6.6 Checking the Clock Status


Checking the clock status for all NEs on a microwave transmission network ensures that the NE
clocks are synchronized.

Prerequisites
l

Clock configuration has been completed.

The links that transmit clock signals are functioning properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure checks the clock status of NEs on a network.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

85

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Procedure
Step 1 Check the clock status of an NE.

Step 2 Repeat Step 1 to check the clock status of the other NEs on the network.
----End

6.7 Testing the Fade Margin over a Microwave Link


The fade margin over a microwave link can be evaluated by measuring the mean square errors
(MSEs) at different received signal levels (RSLs).

Prerequisites
l

Weather conditions are favorable.

Antennas have been aligned, and the RSLs at both ends of the microwave link meet
requirements.

The configured transmit power is the same as the actual transmit power.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The procedure for testing the fade margin is as follows:
l

Test the mapping between RSLs and MSEs at multiple sites.

Calculate the RSL corresponding to the MSE demodulation threshold to determine the
receiver sensitivity.

Subtract the receiver sensitivity from the current RSL to obtain the fade margin.

The following procedure tests the fade margin over a microwave link.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

86

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Precautions
1.

When the fade margin is being tested, all the services carried on the microwave link may
be interrupted.

2.

For microwave links configured with 1+1 protection, forcibly switch services to the main
link before testing the main link. Forcibly switch services to the standby link before testing
the standby link.

Procedure
Step 1 Disable the adaptive modulation (AM) and automatic transmit power control (ATPC) functions
on the microwave link between two sites.

Step 2 Test the fade margin over the microwave link.

Step 3 Enable the AM and ATPC functions for the microwave link base on Step 1.
NOTE

Restore Modulation Mode of the Guaranteed AM Capacity and Modulation Mode of the Full AM
Capacity to their initial values when enabling the AM function.

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

87

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

6.8 Testing Ethernet Service Performance


This section describes how to test Ethernet service performance using the NE-inherent test
functions.
6.8.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio
This section describes how to test the latency, throughput, and packet loss ratio of VLAN-based
Ethernet line (E-Line) services with different frame lengths.
6.8.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio
This section describes how to test the long-term packet loss ratio of VLAN-based Ethernet line
(E-Line) services with different frame lengths.

6.8.1 Testing the Latency, Throughput, and Packet Loss Ratio


This section describes how to test the latency, throughput, and packet loss ratio of VLAN-based
Ethernet line (E-Line) services with different frame lengths.

Prerequisites
l

Antenna alignment has been completed.

The source and sink NEs of the Ethernet services have been configured with VLAN-based
E-Line services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context

NOTICE
l The source and sink ports (test ports) of the tested Ethernet services must be Ethernet ports.
During the test, all Ethernet services over the test ports are interrupted.
l If the tested Ethernet services contain quality of service (QoS), OAM, link aggregation group
(LAG), or other protocol data, the test results may be inaccurate. It is recommended that you
disable the functions before performing the test.
l If the source port of the tested services carries other services, the test results may be
inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the other services at the source port before
performing the test.

Test Connection Diagram


The Ethernet services between P&E on NE1 and P&E on NE2 shown in Figure 6-7 are tested.
Both NE1 and NE2 are configured with VLAN-based E-Line services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

88

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Figure 6-7 Test connection diagram

The Ethernet services between NE1 and NE2 carry the VLAN ID 100.
NOTE

The VLAN ID of the E-Line service to be tested must be the same as the default VLAN ID of the test port.
Otherwise, the source and sink NEs cannot be successfully created.

Procedure
Step 1 Disable the inband DCN of the test ports.
NE1 is used as an example:

Step 2 Disable the access control of the test ports.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

89

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

NOTICE
This operation may cause DCN interruption.
Step 3 Configure the TAG attributes for the test ports.
NE1 is used as an example:

Step 4 Configure a sink NE for the test.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

90

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 5 Configure a source NE for the test and initiate the test.

NOTE

l The test results may deviate from the actual values, as compared with the results of a test performed using
a meter. When the bandwidth of tested services is less than 70 Mbit/s, the deviation of the packet loss ratio
is less than 1%. When the bandwidth of tested services is higher than or equal to 70 Mbit/s, the deviation of
the packet loss ratio is less than 0.2%. If the packet loss ratio is not 0 and its deviation is within these ranges,
perform the test multiple times. If the results of the multiple tests show that a few packets are lost and the
packet loss ratio of services with long frames is higher than that of services with short frames, you can
consider that no packet is lost.
l The throughput test result of services with long frames deviates from the actual result by less than 5%.
l The latency result and packet loss ratio result are the results of bidirectional services.

----End

6.8.2 Testing the Long-term Packet Loss Ratio


This section describes how to test the long-term packet loss ratio of VLAN-based Ethernet line
(E-Line) services with different frame lengths.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

91

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Prerequisites
l

Antenna alignment has been completed.

The source and sink NEs of the Ethernet services have been configured with VLAN-based
E-Line services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context

NOTICE
l Do not modify data configuration during the test.
l During the Ethernet service test, all Ethernet services over the test ports are interrupted.
l If the tested Ethernet services contain quality of service (QoS), OAM, link aggregation group
(LAG), or other protocol data, the test results may be inaccurate. It is recommended that you
disable the functions before performing the test.
l If the source port of the tested services carries other services, the test results may be
inaccurate. It is recommended that you disable the other services at the source port before
performing the test.

Test Connection Diagram


The Ethernet services between P&E on NE1 and P&E on NE2 shown in Figure 6-8 are tested.
Both NE1 and NE2 are configured with VLAN-based E-Line services.
Figure 6-8 Test connection diagram

The Ethernet services between NE1 and NE2 carry the VLAN ID 100.

Procedure
Step 1 Disable the inband DCN of the test ports.
NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

92

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 2 Disable the access control of the test ports.


NE1 is used as an example:

NOTICE
This operation may cause DCN interruption.
Step 3 Configure the TAG attributes for the test ports.
NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

93

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

Step 4 Configure a sink NE for the test.

Step 5 Configure a source NE for the test and initiate the test.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

94

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

6 System Commissioning

NOTE

The test results may deviate from the actual values. When the number of received packets and that of sent packets
are different and the difference is less than a millionth, you can consider that no packet is lost.

----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

95

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment

Handling of Common Faults During Site


Deployment

About This Chapter


This chapter describes how to handle common faults during site deployment.
7.1 Handling a Fault in Commissioning Script Loading Using a USB Flash Drive
This section describes how to handle the fault that occurs when some commands fail to be loaded
during the commissioning script loading using a USB flash drive.
7.2 Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the Design Requirements
This section describes how to handle the fault of receive power failing to meet the design
requirements.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

96

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment

7.1 Handling a Fault in Commissioning Script Loading


Using a USB Flash Drive
This section describes how to handle the fault that occurs when some commands fail to be loaded
during the commissioning script loading using a USB flash drive.

Fault Symptom
When a USB flash drive is used for loading commissioning data, the indicator on the USB flash
drive is steady red after the loading is complete.

Cause Analysis
Steady red indicates that some commands fail to be loaded. You can locate these commands in
NE operation logs.

Procedure
Step 1 Querying NE Operation Logs.

Step 2 Record Operation Object in the logs with Result being Operation Failed, and send the
recorded information to the engineers responsible for generating data scripts.
NOTE

If commissioning engineers are able to configure NE data on the Web LCT, they can re-configure data related
to the failed commands based on the logs using the Web LCT.

Step 3 After correct scripts are generated, arrange personnel to load the commissioning data using a
USB flash drive. For details, see 4.2 Loading Commissioning Data Using a USB Flash
Drive.
----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

97

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment

7.2 Handling the Failure of the Receive Power to Meet the


Design Requirements
This section describes how to handle the fault of receive power failing to meet the design
requirements.

Fault Symptom
No hardware alarm is reported on an NE. However, the receive power is at least 3 dB less than
the designed receive power, and the microwave link reports an MW_LOF alarm.

Cause Analysis
No hardware alarm is reported, so the equipment is running normally. Diagnose the fault from
the following aspects:
l

NE configurations

Link transmission conditions and network plan

Hardware installation and antenna alignment

Procedure
Step 1 Check NE configurations by browsing the configuration data of the microwave link according
to 8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link.
l Verify that the actual transmit and receive frequencies at both ends of the link match and
meet the network plan requirements.
l Verify that the channel bandwidths and modulation schemes at both ends of the link are the
same and meet the network plan requirements.
l Verify that the transmit power at both ends of the link meets the network plan requirements.
l Verify that the adaptive modulation (AM) and automatic transmit power control (ATPC)
functions are disabled during antenna alignment.
Step 2 Check the link transmission conditions and network plan.
l Verify that antennas are aligned under favorable weather conditions, free from the impact of
rainfall, snow, or fog.
l Verify the line of sight (LOS) on the microwave link based on a map and observation.
l Verify that the antenna positions and directions meet the network plan requirements by using
a compass.
l Verify that the height difference between the antennas is within the adjustment range and
that the network design parameters are correct by consulting network planning engineers.
Step 3 Check hardware installation and antenna alignment.
l Verify that the polarization directions of the antennas meet the network plan requirements.
When an OptiX RTN 380 or hybrid coupler is being installed, the polarization directions of
feed ports are the same.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

98

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

7 Handling of Common Faults During Site Deployment

l Verify that the main lobes of the antennas are aligned.


----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

99

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring Networkwide Service Data

About This Chapter


This document uses configuration examples to describe the flow and procedure for configuring
the equipment. With this document, you can get familiar with the data configuration methods
and complete various configuration tasks in actual application.
NOTE

This document describes the service configuration on the U2000-T.

8.1 Configuration Preparations


Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.
8.2 General Configuration Process
Select a proper configuration process based on the actual configuration scenarios.
8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples
This section provides the initial configuration examples which are based on five network
scenarios and cover all operations in the general configuration process.
8.4 Configuring the Network Topology
You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network
topology.
8.5 Configuring Microwave Links
Before configuring services on a microwave link, you need to configure the microwave link.
8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services
Ethernet services include Native Ethernet line (E-Line) services and Native Ethernet local area
network (E-LAN) services.
8.7 Configuring CPRI Services
The OptiX RTN 380 supports transparent transmission of CPRI services.
8.8 Configuring Clocks
To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure
the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy.
8.9 Common Service Configuration Operations
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

100

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

This section provides hyperlinks to common service configuration operations.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

101

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.1 Configuration Preparations


Before configuring the NE data, you must make the required preparations.
8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools
Related documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.
8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions
Before beginning the configuration process, confirm that local conditions meet requirements.
8.1.3 U2000 Quick Start
This chapter describes basic operations on the U2000 client.

8.1.1 Preparing Documents and Tools


Related documents and tools must be available to ensure the proper configuration of data.

Documents
l

Network planning documents

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Tools
A computer where the U2000 software is installed
l

A computer where the U2000 server software is installed

A computer where the U2000 client software is installed


NOTE

For requirements and methods for installing U2000 software and hardware, see the documents that accompany
the U2000.

8.1.2 Checking Configuration Conditions


Before beginning the configuration process, confirm that local conditions meet requirements.

Context
Ensure that the following requirements are met:
l

All the NEs on the network must be powered on properly.

Data communication network (DCN) communication between the gateway NE and the
non-gateway NEs must be normal.

The network communication between the U2000 server and the gateway NE must be
normal.

The U2000 client can log in to the U2000 server and has network operator rights or higher.

The gateway NE must log in to the computer where the U2000 software is installed.

8.1.3 U2000 Quick Start


This chapter describes basic operations on the U2000 client.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

102

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.1.3.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client


The U2000 uses the client/server architecture and allows multiple clients. You can log in to the
U2000 server from a U2000 client to manage OptiX RTN NEs.
8.1.3.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client
Shut down a U2000 client when it will not to be used.
8.1.3.3 Using the Help
The Help provides help information about the U2000.
8.1.3.4 Navigating to Common Views
This section describes how to navigate to the common views of the U2000 and the functions of
the views.

8.1.3.1 Logging In to a U2000 Client


The U2000 uses the client/server architecture and allows multiple clients. You can log in to the
U2000 server from a U2000 client to manage OptiX RTN NEs.

Prerequisites
l

The U2000 system has been started on the U2000 server.

The IP address of the U2000 client is in the access control list (ACL) configured in the
U2000 system.

The U2000 client is communicating with the U2000 server properly.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1

----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

103

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.1.3.2 Shutting Down a U2000 Client


Shut down a U2000 client when it will not to be used.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Instruments, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.1.3.3 Using the Help


The Help provides help information about the U2000.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

104

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.1.3.4 Navigating to Common Views


This section describes how to navigate to the common views of the U2000 and the functions of
the views.
8.1.3.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology
The U2000 provides the Main Topology view for network topology management.
8.1.3.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer
The U2000 provides the NE Explorer view for equipment management. The NE Explorer view
consists of the function tree pane, object tree pane, and configuration pane.
8.1.3.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel
NE Panel displays the boards configured on an NE. Different colors represent different board
status.

8.1.3.4.1 Navigating to Main Topology


The U2000 provides the Main Topology view for network topology management.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

105

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.1.3.4.2 Navigating to NE Explorer


The U2000 provides the NE Explorer view for equipment management. The NE Explorer view
consists of the function tree pane, object tree pane, and configuration pane.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Procedure
Step 1

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

106

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.1.3.4.3 Navigating to the NE Panel


NE Panel displays the boards configured on an NE. Different colors represent different board
status.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000

Context
The following procedure navigates to NE Panel.

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.2 General Configuration Process


Select a proper configuration process based on the actual configuration scenarios.

Initial Configuration
Initial configuration of a microwave network refers to initial configuration of network-wide
service data using the network management system (NMS) after site commissioning is complete.
Figure 8-1 shows the configuration flowchart.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

107

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-1 Flowchart for initial configuration

Start

Required
Optional

Configure the network


topology.
Configure microwave
links.

Configure Native
Ethernet services.

Configure CPRI
services.

Configure the clock.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described in Table 8-1.


Table 8-1 Initial configuration

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.4 Configuring the Network


Topology

Required.

8.5 Configuring Microwave Links

Required.

8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services


or Configuring CPRI Services

Required.

8.8 Configuring Clocks

Required during the configuration of Native Ethernet


services.

NOTE
Ethernet services and CPRI services are mutually exclusive.
Therefore, configure one service at a time.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

108

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

The configuration sequence provided in Table 8-1 is for reference only and needs to be adjusted based on actual
scenarios. For detailed configuration methods based on local scenarios, see the configuration examples
corresponding to 8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples.

8.3 Common Network Scenarios of Configuration Examples


This section provides the initial configuration examples which are based on five network
scenarios and cover all operations in the general configuration process.
8.3.1 Overview
This section provides the relationships between configuration examples and various networks.
8.3.2 Microwave Chain Network
A microwave chain network consists of three sites and four OptiX RTN 380s.
8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network
This section describes a microwave ring network consisting of six OptiX RTN 380 devices
located at three sites.
8.3.4 Hybrid Network Consisting of Radio Equipment and Optical Fibers
This section describes a hybrid network consisting of radio equipment and optical fibers. In this
network, a hop of large-capacity OptiX RTN 380 equipment replace optical fibers to form a ring
network with OptiX optical transmission equipment.
8.3.5 Large-Capacity Microwave Backhaul Network Configured with 1+1 Protection
This section describes a large-capacity microwave backhaul network consisting of four OptiX
RTN 380 devices and OptiX RTN 900 equipment. The equipment forms 1+1 protection.
8.3.6 Network for Transparently Transmitting CPRI Services over Microwave Signals
In this example, one microwave link hop transparently transmits one channel of 1.25 Gbit/s
CPRI services.

8.3.1 Overview
This section provides the relationships between configuration examples and various networks.
NOTE

See the table below, indicates that a configuration example is provided and - indicates that no
configuration example is provided.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

109

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-2 Configuration examples for different networks

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Microwa
ve Chain
Network

Microwa
ve Ring
Network

Hybrid
Network
Consistin
g of Radio
Equipme
nt and
Optical
Fibers

LargeCapacity
Microwav
e
Backhaul
Network
Configur
ed with 1
+1
Protectio
n

Network
for
Transpare
ntly
Transmitt
ing CPRI
Services
over
Microwav
e Signals

Configure the
network topology

Configure microwave
links

Config
ure
Native
Ethern
et
service
s

Transparen
tly
transmitted
point-topoint ELine
service

VLANbased ELine
service

IEEE
802.1D
bridgebased ELAN
service

IEEE
802.1Q
bridgebased ELAN
service

Configure CPRI
services

Config
ure the
clock

Clock on a
microwave
chain
network

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

110

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Operation

Clock on a
microwave
ring
network

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Microwa
ve Chain
Network

Microwa
ve Ring
Network

Hybrid
Network
Consistin
g of Radio
Equipme
nt and
Optical
Fibers

LargeCapacity
Microwav
e
Backhaul
Network
Configur
ed with 1
+1
Protectio
n

Network
for
Transpare
ntly
Transmitt
ing CPRI
Services
over
Microwav
e Signals

8.3.2 Microwave Chain Network


A microwave chain network consists of three sites and four OptiX RTN 380s.
Figure 8-2 shows the topology of the network. Ethernet services are received on NE2 and NE4
and are transmitted to the local backhaul network through NE1.
Figure 8-2 Networking diagram for a microwave chain network

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

111

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network


This section describes a microwave ring network consisting of six OptiX RTN 380 devices
located at three sites.
Figure 8-3 shows the topology of the network. Ethernet services are received on NE6 and NE3
and are transmitted to the local backhaul network through NE5.
Figure 8-3 Networking diagram for a microwave ring network

8.3.4 Hybrid Network Consisting of Radio Equipment and Optical


Fibers
This section describes a hybrid network consisting of radio equipment and optical fibers. In this
network, a hop of large-capacity OptiX RTN 380 equipment replace optical fibers to form a ring
network with OptiX optical transmission equipment.
As shown in Figure 8-4, OptiX RTN 380s can provide high-bandwidth microwave links for
transmitting Ethernet services on a metro optical Ethernet in areas where optical fibers are
difficult to lay out.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

112

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-4 Networking diagram of a hybrid ring network consisting of radio equipment and
optical fibers

8.3.5 Large-Capacity Microwave Backhaul Network Configured


with 1+1 Protection
This section describes a large-capacity microwave backhaul network consisting of four OptiX
RTN 380 devices and OptiX RTN 900 equipment. The equipment forms 1+1 protection.
As shown in Figure 8-5, the OptiX RTN 380 can provide large-capacity backhaul links for
convergence nodes. In addition, it can form 1+1 protection with an OptiX RTN 900 NE to protect
services on the backhaul links.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

113

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-5 Networking diagram of a large-capacity microwave backhaul network configured


with 1+1 protection

8.3.6 Network for Transparently Transmitting CPRI Services over


Microwave Signals
In this example, one microwave link hop transparently transmits one channel of 1.25 Gbit/s
CPRI services.
Figure 8-6 shows the network topology for transparently transmitting CPRI services. On this
network, NE1 receives one 1.25 Gbit/s CPRI service from the remote radio unit (RRU) and
transparently transmits the CPRI service to NE2 over one hop of microwave link; NE2 then
transmits the CPRI service to the baseband unit (BBU). In this manner, a remote RRU can also
be connected to the BBU.
Figure 8-6 Transparently transmitting CPRI services over microwave signals

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

114

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.4 Configuring the Network Topology


You can manage a transport network by using the U2000 only after configuring the network
topology.
8.4.1 Basic Concepts
Before configuring the network topology, familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.
8.4.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology)
This section provides the process for configuring NEs, DCNs, and fibers/cables.
8.4.3 Configuration Example (Network Topology)
In this example, the default DCN solution (IP DCN solution) provided by the RTN 300 is used.

8.4.1 Basic Concepts


Before configuring the network topology, familiarize yourself with the basic concepts.
8.4.1.1 Introduction to DCN
Through the data communication network (DCN), the NMS communicates with transmission
NEs to manage and maintain them.
8.4.1.2 IP DCN
This section describes the basic knowledge about IP DCN.
8.4.1.3 Fiber/Cable Types
You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relationship between NEs by using the fiber
management function of the U2000. You can also use the U2000 to manage fibers and cables,
including Ethernet fibers/cables, microwave links.

8.4.1.1 Introduction to DCN


Through the data communication network (DCN), the NMS communicates with transmission
NEs to manage and maintain them.

DCN Composition
The DCN contains two types of node: NMS and NE. The DCN between the NMS and NEs are
called external DCN. The DCN among NEs are called internal DCN. The external DCN consists
of data communication devices, such as Ethernet switches and routers. The internal DCN consists
of NEs that are connected using DCN channels. Unless otherwise specified, the DCN mentioned
in this document refers to internal DCN.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

115

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

DCN Channel
DCN channels fall into two types: outband DCN channel and inband DCN channel.
l

Oubtband DCN channels do not occupy any service bandwidth. The RTN 300 supports
two types of outband DCN channel:
D1 to D3 bytes in microwave frames
Channels over NMS ports

Inband DCN channels occupy some service bandwidth. The RTN 300 supports two types
of inband DCN channel:
Some Ethernet service bandwidth of microwave links
Some Ethernet service bandwidth of Ethernet links

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

116

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

DCN Solutions
The RTN 300 provides the following DCN solutions:
l

IP DCN solution
In the IP DCN solution, network management messages are encapsulated into IP packets.
NEs forward the IP packets based on the IP addresses contained in them. This solution
supports a maximum of 200 NEs and ensures high network stability. This solution is the
default and preferred solution.

L2 DCN solution
In the L2 DCN solution, network management messages are encapsulated into IP packets,
which are carried by Ethernet frames. NEs forward the Ethernet frames based on the MAC

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

117

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

addresses contained in them. This solution supports a maximum of 1024 NEs. However,
this solution has the risk of broadcast packet flooding and provides poor network stability.

The RTN 300 also supports the HWECC solution, which is eliminated gradually.

NE Types on the DCN


Two types of NE are available on the DCN: gateway NE and non-gateway NE.
Gateway NE: The application layer of the NMS directly communicates with the application layer
of a gateway NE. Generally, an NE at the boundary of the internal DCN and external DCN is a
gateway NE. An NE located inside a DCN can also function as a gateway NE. The NEs between
the NMS and the gateway NE inside a DCN forward DCN packets at L2 or L3.

Non-gateway NE: The application layer of the NMS communications with the application layer
of a non-gateway NE through the application layer of a gateway NE. The NEs between the
gateway NE and non-gateway NE forward DCN packets at L2 or L3.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

118

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

DCN Flags
An NE on the DCN must be configured with two DCN flags: NE ID and NE IP address.
An NE ID is used for application layer communication. An NE ID contains three bytes among
which the most significant byte represents the extended ID and the other two bytes represent the
basic ID. For example, if the extended ID is 9 and the basic ID is 1, the NE ID is represented as
9-1.

An NE IP address is used for IP communication. By default, the NE IP address and NE ID of


an NE are associated. Specifically, the last three bytes of the NE IP address correspond to the
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

119

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

three bytes of the NE ID. For example, if an NE ID is changed to 9-1, the corresponding NE IP
address automatically changes to 129.9.0.1.
Once an NE IP address is changed manually, the association relationship between the NE ID
and NE IP address becomes ineffective.

8.4.1.2 IP DCN
This section describes the basic knowledge about IP DCN.

Application of the IP DCN solution


Huawei's IP DCN solution allows an NMS to manage NEs by encapsulating NMS messages in
the IP protocol stack and transmitting them over DCN channels between the NEs. If a network
has only RTN 300s or a combination of RTN 300s and third-party equipment supporting the IP
protocol stack, using an IP DCN is recommended.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

120

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

IP DCN Protocol Stack


To implement IP DCN, equipment must support the IP protocol stack. IP DCN uses the standard
TCP/IP protocol stack architecture.

Layer 1 of the protocol stack is the physical layer, which provides data transmission
channels for data terminal equipment. The RTN 300 provides the following DCN channels:
NMS port: all the bandwidth at the NMS port
DCC channel: three Huawei-defined DCC bytes in a microwave frame at a microwave
port

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

121

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Inband DCN: a portion of Ethernet service bandwidth at an Ethernet or a microwave


port
l

Layer 2 is the data link layer, which provides reliable data transmission to the physical link
layer. DCCs and inband DCNs use the PPP protocol to set up data links. Therefore, IP
addresses of adjacent NEs do not need to be in the same IP network segment.

Layer 3 is the network layer, which specifies the network layer address for a network entity
and provides transferring and addressing functions. NEs implement network layer functions
using the IP protocol. The routes used for IP transferring can be direct routes discovered
by running link layer protocols, manually configured static routes, or dynamic routes
generated running the OSPF protocol. The RTN 300 provides various OSPF features. For
details, see the Specifications.

Layer 4 is the transport layer, which provides end-to-end communication services for the
upper layer. NEs support the TCP/UDP protocol.

Transferring Packets Based on the IP Protocol Stack


In IP DCN, the packets are transferred in either gateway access mode or direct access mode.
In gateway access mode, the packets are transferred as follows:
1.

The NMS transfers application layer packets to the gateway NE through the TCP
connection.

2.

The gateway NE extracts the packets from the TCP/IP protocol stack and delivers them to
the application layer.

3.

The application layer of the gateway NE queries the destination NE address of the packets.
If the address does not belong to the gateway NE, the gateway NE queries the core routing
table of the application layer. The gateway NE obtains the route to the destination NE and
the communication protocol stack of the transit NE according to the destination NE address.
Because the transit NE uses the IP protocol stack, the gateway NE transfers the packets to
the transit NE through the IP protocol stack.

4.

The network layer of the transit NE queries the destination IP address of the packets. If the
address does not belong to the transit NE, the transit NE queries the IP routing table to
obtain the route to the destination NE and then transfers the packets.

5.

The network layer of the destination NE passes the packets to its application layer through
the transport layer because the destination IP address of the packets is the same as the IP
address of the destination NE. The application layer then processes the packets.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

122

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

In direct access mode, the packets are transferred in a different way.


The original gateway NE acts as an ordinary transit NE, and packets are transferred at the network
layer.

Traversing the L2 Network


In actual networking, the RTN 300 is often connects to a third-party L2 network. In this scenario,
IP DCN packets have to traverse the L2 network by enabling the access control function at RTN
300's Ethernet ports.
When the third-party L2 network is located between the NMS and the network comprised of
RTN 300s, the L2 network transmits Ethernet services and DCN packets between the NMS and
the gateway NE. In this instance, the NMS uses the LAN switch to remove the VLAN ID carried
by NMS messages and the access control function is enabled on the Ethernet port. After the
access control function is enabled:
l

The Ethernet port functions as an Ethernet NMS port on the gateway NE.

The IP address of the Ethernet port must be in the same network segment as that of the
NMS IP address and in a network segment different from that of NE IP addresses.

The NMS communicates with the gateway NE based on the IP address of the Ethernet port.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

123

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

When the third-party L2 network is located between two networks comprised of RTN 300s,
NMS messages are encapsulated as L2 services for transmission. In this instance, the access
control function is enabled on the Ethernet ports of the two networks for connecting to the thirdparty L2 network and their IP addresses are in the same network segment.
The third-party L2 network creates a dedicated L2VPN service for the DCN packets carrying a
specific inband DCN VLAN ID.

8.4.1.3 Fiber/Cable Types


You can obtain the clear fiber/cable connection relationship between NEs by using the fiber
management function of the U2000. You can also use the U2000 to manage fibers and cables,
including Ethernet fibers/cables, microwave links.
l

Ethernet fibers/cables
Ethernet fibers/cables refer to the Ethernet fiber/cable connections between Ethernet
optical/electrical ports on different sets of equipment.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

124

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Microwave links
Microwave links refer to the radio connections between different sets of radio equipment.
That is, the microwave links indicate the connection relationship between different IF ports.
NOTE

Fibers and cables are topological objects on the U2000. Therefore, operations on the fibers or cables do not
affect the normal running of the NEs.

8.4.2 Configuration Process (Network Topology)


This section provides the process for configuring NEs, DCNs, and fibers/cables.
Figure 8-7 shows the flowchart for configuring the network topology.
Figure 8-7 Flowchart for configuring the network topology

Required

Start

Optional
Create an NE.

Set NE attributes.

Set the DCN .

Create fibers/cables.

End

NOTE

When the Web LCT is used for configuration, there is no need to create fibers/cables.

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

125

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Creating NEs
Table 8-3 Process of creating NEs
Step

Operation

Creating NEs
on the U2000

Remarks
8.9.1.1
Creating an
NE by Using
the Search
Method

It is recommended that you perform this


operation to add one or more NEs to a large
existing network on the U2000.

8.9.1.2
Creating an
NE Manually

It is recommended that you perform this


operation to create NEs on the U2000 in other
cases.

Configuring NE Attributes
Table 8-4 Process of configuring NE attributes
Step

Operation

Remarks

8.9.1.3
Changing
an NE ID

Required.

8.9.1.4
Changing
an NE
Name

Optional.

Configuring DCN
Table 8-5 Process of configuring DCN

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

8.9.1.5
Setting the
VLAN ID
and
Bandwidth
for an
Inband
DCN

Required.
If the VLAN ID and bandwidth planned for this inband DCN
do not assume their default values (the default VLAN ID is
4094 and the default bandwidth is 512 kbit/s).

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

126

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

8.9.1.6
Configuring
Access
Control

Optional.
By default, access control is enabled for Ethernet interfaces.
Perform this step if you want to modify the IP address or
disable the function.

Creating Fibers/Cables
Table 8-6 Process of creating fibers/cables
Step

Operation

Creating
fibers/
cables

Remarks
8.9.1.7
Creating
a Fiber/
Cable by
Using the
Search
Method

It is recommended that you perform this operation


to create fibers/cables.

8.9.1.8
Creating
a Fiber/
Cable
Manually

It is recommended that you perform this operation


to create fibers/cables that cannot be created using
the search method (for example, when the fiber/
cable has not been connected).

8.4.3 Configuration Example (Network Topology)


In this example, the default DCN solution (IP DCN solution) provided by the RTN 300 is used.
8.4.3.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.4.3.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedure for configuring a microwave chain network.

8.4.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Figure 8-8 shows a microwave chain network configured according to the following
requirements:
l

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

A microwave chain network consists of three sites and four OptiX RTN 380s, which are
managed by the U2000.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

127

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

The local backhaul network is a third-party network and cannot be managed together with
the OptiX RTN equipment. NE1 is configured as the gateway NE, and it communicates
with U2000s using the access control function.

The NEs use the D1 to D3 bytes in microwave links or partial Ethernet bandwidth in GE
links for data communication network (DCN) communication that is implemented using
IP.

Figure 8-8 Networking diagram for a microwave chain network

8.4.3.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring a microwave chain network.

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

DCN

l Use the IP DCN solution. l The default IP DCN


solution is recommended.
l Change the VLAN IDs of
all inband DCN channels
to 4094 (default) and the
bandwidth to 512 kbit/s
(default).

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Planning Principle

l The VLAN ID of inband


DCN channels must be
different from service
VLAN IDs.

128

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

NE ID and NE IP address

See the following figure.

l Each NE must have a


unique NE ID and IP
address.
l If access control is
enabled for the port
connected to the NMS, it
is recommended to
maintain the correlation
between NE IP addresses
and NE IDs (by not
manually modifying NE
IP addresses). Modifying
an NE ID does not affect
the correlation between
the NE ID and the
corresponding IP address
of a non-gateway NE. If
the IP address of a nongateway NE is not
changed manually, the
NE automatically
changes the IP address to
be the planned value after
the NE ID is changed.
(For example, it the NE
ID is NE9-22, the NE IP
address is automatically
changed to 129.9.0.22.)

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Gateway NE

NE1

Access Control

Access control is enabled on


the P&E port (IP address:
10.0.0.1) of NE1. Access
control is enabled for other
interfaces by default and the
setting is not modified.

If access control is enabled


on the Ethernet port of the
gateway NE, ensure that the
IP address of this Ethernet
port is in the same network
segment as the IP address of
the NMS but in a different
network segment from the IP
address of the gateway NE.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

129

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-9 Allocated IDs and IP addresses

Precautions
NOTE

If the NE ID and NE name are changed during commissioning on a per-NE basis, skip the operations.

Procedure
Step 1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method.

NOTE

In this example, the IP address of the P&E interface of the gateway NE has been modified to the planned
value during NE commissioning.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

130

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Normally, the icons of NE1 to NE4 should be displayed on the main topology and all the NE
data should be uploaded successfully.
Step 2 Change an NE ID.
NE1 is used as an example.

Step 3 Change an NE Name.


NE1 is used as an example.

Step 4 Configuring Access Control.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

131

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 5 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method


1.

Create a microwave link on the RTN subnet using the search method.
The microwave link between NE1 and NE2 is used as an example.

2.

Create an Ethernet link on the RTN subnet using the search method.
The Ethernet link between NE2 and NE3 is used as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

132

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.5 Configuring Microwave Links


Before configuring services on a microwave link, you need to configure the microwave link.
8.5.1 Configuration Process (Microwave Links)
The core operation of configuring microwave links is managing a hop of microwave link.
8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network)
This section describes how to configure 1+0 microwave links.
8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links with 1+1 Protection)
This section describes how to configure a microwave link hop configured with 1+1 HSB
protection.

8.5.1 Configuration Process (Microwave Links)


The core operation of configuring microwave links is managing a hop of microwave link.
Figure 8-10 shows the flowchart for configuring microwave links.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

133

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-10 Flowchart for configuring microwave links


Microwave Links with 1+1
Protection

Required

Microwave Links on
a Chain Network

Start

Start

Create a microwave 1+1


protection group.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Configure a hop of
microwave link.

Create a microwave link


after it is found.

Synchronizing Data Between


Main and Standby NEs

End

Optional

Create a microwave link


after it is found.

End
NOTE

The preceding flowcharts provide basic processes of configuring microwave links.

The steps in the flowchart are described as follows:

Configuring Microwave Links


Table 8-7 Process of configuring microwave links with 1+1 HSB protection
Operation
Creating a
microwave 1
+1 protection
group

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Remarks
8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line
Service or 8.9.3.9 Deleting
an E-LAN Service

Required. Ensure that the 1+1 cascade ports are


not configured with services. Otherwise, 1+1
protection configuration will fail.
NOTE
By default, an OptiX RTN 380 creates a bridgebased E-LAN service. All ports of the OptiX RTN
380 are mounted to the bridge. The Ethernet ports
that do not participate in 1+1 protection will result
in a 1+1 protection configuration failure. Therefore,
you must delete this E-LAN service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

134

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

Operation

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Remarks
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG

This step is ignored when an optical splitter is


used and is required when no optical splitter is
used.
Configure a LAG on each of the main OptiX
RTN 380s and each of the standby OptiX RTN
380s. The LAG has only one member port that
receives and transmits Ethernet services.

8.9.2.1 Creating a
Microwave 1+1
Protection Group

Required.

8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave


Link

Required. Only the main NE needs to be


configured with a microwave link.

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between


Main and Standby NEs (1+1)

Configuration data is synchronized between


the main and standby NEs.

8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using


the Search Method

In normal cases, Main Topology displays the


previously created microwave links.

Table 8-8 Configuring microwave links with 1+0 protection


Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave


Link

Required.

8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using


the Search Method

In normal cases, Main Topology displays the


previously created microwave links.

8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on a Chain


Network)
This section describes how to configure 1+0 microwave links.
8.5.2.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.5.2.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedure for configuring microwave links on a microwave chain
network.

8.5.2.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Configure the microwave links on the chain network according to the following requirements:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

135

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Enable AMAC for all microwave links, because they carry Ethernet services.

Table 8-9 provides the requirements on the services from NodeB 1 and RAN 1.
Table 8-9 Capacity of services from NodeB 1 and RAN 1
Service Capacity

NodeB 1

RAN 1

Capacity of high-priority
Ethernet services (Mbit/s)

40

100

Capacity of low-priority
Ethernet services (Mbit/s)

60

600

NOTE

High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority services must not
be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not require
transmission guarantees. Low-priority services can be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. The
common service priorities are provided in Table 8-10.

Table 8-10 Common service priorities

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Service Type

Priority

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet


services

High

Streaming media, background, and


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Low

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

136

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-11 Networking diagram for microwave links on a chain network

8.5.2.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring microwave links on a microwave chain
network.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

137

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation
Figure 8-12 Microwave link configurations on a chain network

Context
NOTE

l The following procedure takes configuring the link between NE1 and NE2 as an example. Configuring
the link between NE3 and NE4 is similar.
l The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link shown in the
following figure by configuring NE1.

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

138

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.5.3 Configuration Example (Microwave Links with 1+1


Protection)
This section describes how to configure a microwave link hop configured with 1+1 HSB
protection.
8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.5.3.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedure for configuring large-capacity backhaul microwave links
with 1+1 protection.

8.5.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Figure 8-13 shows a hop of important microwave link. Two OptiX RTN 380 devices are
cascaded at each site for receiving two channels of GE services (from RAN 1 and RAN 2) from
the OptiX RTN 900 convergence node. 1+1 HSB protection is configured to guarantee reliable
transmission of the GE services.
l

Enable AMAC for the microwave links.

Table 8-11 provides the requirements on the services from the RAN 1 and RAN 2.
Table 8-11 Capacity of services from RAN 1 and RAN 2

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Service Capacity

RAN 1

RAN 2

Capacity of high-priority
Ethernet services (Mbit/s)

100

100

Capacity of low-priority
Ethernet services (Mbit/s)

800

800

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

139

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

High-priority services are services that require transmission guarantees. High-priority services must not
be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. Low-priority services are services that do not require
transmission guarantees. Low-priority services can be discarded in modulation scheme shifts. The
common service priorities are provided in Table 8-12.

Table 8-12 Common service priorities


Service Type

Priority

Voice, signaling, and OM Ethernet


services

High

Streaming media, background, and


interactive Ethernet services, for example,
Internet services

Low

Figure 8-13 Networking diagram for 1+1 HSB protection

8.5.3.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring large-capacity backhaul microwave links
with 1+1 protection.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

140

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation
Figure 8-14 Data Planning

Table 8-13 LAG plan


Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Static (default value)

Configure the same aggregation


type at both ends. Static aggregation
is recommended.

Load sharing mode

Non-Sharing (default value)

Configure the same load sharing


mode at both ends. Configure a load
non-sharing LAG to provide
protection.

System priority

32768 (default value)

The default value is recommended.


The system priority can be set only
in static aggregation.

Master ports

l LAG1: P&E

It is recommended that you set the


main ports consistently for the
equipment at both ends.

LAG type

l LAG2: GE(e)

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

141

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-14 1+1 HSB plan


Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Service Protection Type

LAG (default value)

Revertive Mode

Revertive Mode (default value)

In 1+1 HSB protection, you can


initiate configuration
synchronization only on a main NE
in the working state. To ensure that
the working NE is the main NE,
"Revertive Mode" is recommended
here.

WTR Time

600s (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching

Enabled (default value)

Service Port

l Service 1: P&E

It is recommended to set the main


port consistently at both ends. A
service port cannot be configured as
a cascade port.

l Service 2: GE(e)

Cascade

Combo

Any GE port can function as a


cascade port. Cascade port
configurations must be consistent at
both ends. A cascade port cannot be
configured as a service port.

NOTE

The following procedure takes configuring NE1 as an example.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete the default E-LAN service.
NOTE

By default, an OptiX RTN 380 NE is configured with a bridge-based E-LAN service which is mounted to all
ports. In this example, the COMBO port functions as a 1+1 cascade port cannot carry Ethernet services. If it
carries Ethernet services, 1+1 protection cannot be created. Therefore, delete the E-LAN service before
configuring E-LAN or E-Line services according to the service plan.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

142

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Configure a LAG for each Ethernet service access port on the main and standby NEs. This step
explains how to configure LAG1 on NE1 and NE3.

Step 3 Create a microwave 1+1 protection group on the main and standby NEs.

Step 4 Manage a hop of microwave link.


Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

143

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link shown in the following
figure by configuring NE1.

Step 5 Synchronize data between the main and standby NEs in the 1+1 protection group.

----End

8.6 Configuring Ethernet Services


Ethernet services include Native Ethernet line (E-Line) services and Native Ethernet local area
network (E-LAN) services.
8.6.1 Port Description
OptiX RTN 380 provides four GE ports.
8.6.2 Ethernet Service Types
Native Ethernet services are classified into six types.
8.6.3 Configuration Process
The service configuration process differs according to the specific service type.
8.6.4 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

144

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

This section uses a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service as an example to


describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the network plan.
8.6.5 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Services)
This section uses a VLAN-based E-Line service as an example to describe how to configure
Ethernet services according to the service plan.
8.6.6 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service)
This section provides an example of how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN
service according to the plan.
8.6.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)
This section uses an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure Ethernet services according to the service plan.

8.6.1 Port Description


OptiX RTN 380 provides four GE ports.
Figure 8-15 shows the physical Ethernet ports on the OptiX RTN 380. Table 8-15 provides the
logical ports and functions of the physical Ethernet ports.
Figure 8-15 Ports on the OptiX RTN 380

Table 8-15 Description of ports on the OptiX RTN 380


Physical
Port

Logical Port

Description

P&E

1-MXUF4-2
(P&E)

A P&E port can function as an electrical GE port.

COMBO

1-MXUF4-3
(COMBO)

A COMBO port is a versatile composite port and can be configured as a GE


service port or CPRI port.

GE(o)

1-MXUF4-4(GE
(o))

A GE port with an SFP module can function as an optical GE port.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

145

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Physical
Port

Logical Port

Description

GE(e)

1-MXUF4-5(GE
(e))

A GE(e) port can function as an electrical GE port.

8.6.2 Ethernet Service Types


Native Ethernet services are classified into six types.
8.6.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service
The transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet line (E-Line) service is the basic E-Line
model. Point-to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service
isolation, or service distinguishing. Instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted
between two service access points.
8.6.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service
You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet line (E-Line) services, which allows the E-Line
services to share one physical transmission channel. E-Line services separated in this manner
are called VLAN-based E-Line services.
8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services
S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one
physical channel for transmission. Therefore, S-VLAN tags can separate more services than CVLAN tags. These services are called QinQ-based E-Line services.
8.6.2.4 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services that are forwarded based only on the MAC address
table are called IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.
8.6.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services
You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services and divide an
IEEE 802.1Q bridge into multiple independent switching sub-domains. E-LAN services
separated in this manner are called IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.
8.6.2.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services
S-VLANs can be used to divide a bridge into sub-switching domains. Services from different
users are separated when they are transmitted in different sub-switching domains. These services
are called 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services.

8.6.2.1 Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service


The transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet line (E-Line) service is the basic E-Line
model. Point-to-point transmission does not involve service bandwidth sharing, service
isolation, or service distinguishing. Instead, Ethernet services are transparently transmitted
between two service access points.

Service Model
Table 8-16 describes the transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

146

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-16 Transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service model


Service Model

Traffic Flow

Service Direction

Encapsulation
Type

Description

Model 1

PORT (source)

UNI-UNI

Null (source)

The source port


transparently
transmits all the
received Ethernet
frames to the sink
port.

PORT (sink)

Null (sink)

Model 2

PORT (source)

NOTE
In service model 2,
ports process
Ethernet frames
based on their Tag
attribute or QinQclass domain.
Therefore, service
model 2 is not a real
transparent
transmission model
and is not
recommended.

PORT (sink)

UNI-UNI

802.1Q/QINQ
(source)
802.1Q/QINQ
(sink)

The source port


processes the
incoming Ethernet
frames based on
their TAG attribute
or QinQ-class
domain, and then
sends the processed
Ethernet frames to
the sink port. The
sink port processes
the Ethernet frames
based on its TAG
attribute, and then
exports the
processed Ethernet
frames.

Typical Application
Figure 8-16 shows the typical application of transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line
service model.
Figure 8-16 Typical application of Transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service
model
NE 1

Service 1

Port 1

E-Line

NE 2
Port 2

Transmission
network

Port 2

E-Line

Port 1

Service 1

In model 1, Ethernet service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, regardless of whether the
Ethernet service carries an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN ID. Port 1 transparently transmits
Ethernet service 1 to port 2. Port 2 transmits Ethernet service 1 to NE2. Service processing on
NE2 is the same as that on NE1.
In model 2, Ethernet service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through port 1, regardless of whether the
Ethernet service carries an unknown VLAN ID or no VLAN ID. Port 1 and Port 2 process the
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

147

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

incoming packets based on their own TAG attributes or QinQ-class domain. Then, Port 2 sends
Ethernet service 1 to NE2. Service processing on NE2 is the same as that on NE1.

8.6.2.2 VLAN-based E-Line Service


You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet line (E-Line) services, which allows the E-Line
services to share one physical transmission channel. E-Line services separated in this manner
are called VLAN-based E-Line services.

Service Model
Table 8-17 provides information about the VLAN-based E-Line service model.
Table 8-17 VLAN-based E-Line service model
Service Type

Service Flow

Service Direction

Encapsulation
Type at a Port

Service
Description

VLAN-based ELine service

PORT+VLAN
(source)

UNI-UNI (UNI
stands for user-tonetwork interface.)

IEEE 802.1Q
(source)

The source port


processes incoming
Ethernet frames
based on its tag
attribute, and then
sends Ethernet
frames containing a
specific VLAN ID
to the sink port. The
sink port processes
the Ethernet frames
based on its tag
attribute, and then
transmits the
processed Ethernet
frames.

PORT+VLAN
(sink)

IEEE 802.1Q (sink)

Typical Application
Figure 8-17 shows a typical application of the VLAN-based E-Line service model. Services 1,
2, 3, and 4 from four NodeBs converge through a transmission network to a radio network
controller (RNC).
l

Services 1, 2, 3, and 4 carry different VLAN IDs.

On NE 1, services 1 and 2 are received at port 2 and port 3, respectively, and forwarded
through port 1. They share the same channel but are isolated by VLANs.

On NE 2, services 3 and 4 are received at port 2 and port 3, respectively, and forwarded
through port 1. They share the same channel but are isolated by VLANs.

On NE 3, services 1 and 2 are received at port 2, services 3 and 4 are received at port 3,
and all four services are forwarded through port 1. All the services share the same channel
but are isolated by VLANs.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

148

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Ports 2 and 3 on NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3 process incoming Ethernet frames based on their


tag attributes and transmit the Ethernet frames to port 1. Port 1 processes outgoing Ethernet
frames based on its tag attribute. Because the services have different VLAN IDs, they can
share ports 1 on NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3.

Figure 8-17 VLAN-based E-Line service model


Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200
Service 3
VLAN ID: 300
Service 4
VLAN ID: 400

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200
Port 1
NE 3
Port 1

RNC

E-Line
E-Line

NE 1
E-Line
E-Line

Port 2
Port 3

Port 2

Port 3
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200
NodeB 2

Transmission
Network
E-Line

Port 1
Service 3
VLAN ID: 300
Service 4
VLAN ID: 400

E-Line

NodeB 1

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Port 2
Port 3

Service 3
NodeB 3 VLAN ID: 300

NE 2

Service 4
VLAN ID: 400
NodeB 4

8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services


S-VLAN tags can be used to separate several E-Line services so that these services share one
physical channel for transmission. Therefore, S-VLAN tags can separate more services than CVLAN tags. These services are called QinQ-based E-Line services.

Service Model
Table 8-18 shows the QinQ-based E-Line service models.
Table 8-18 QinQ-based E-Line service models
Service
Model

Service Flow

Service
Direction

Port Encapsulation
Mode

Service Description

Model 1

PORT (source)

UNI-NNI

Null (source)

The source port adds the SVLAN tag that corresponds


to the QinQ link to all the
received Ethernet frames,
and then transmits the
Ethernet frames to the sink
port to which the QinQ link is
connected.

QinQ link (sink)

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

QinQ (sink)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

149

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Service
Model

Service Flow

Service
Direction

Port Encapsulation
Mode

Service Description

Model 2

PORT (source)

UNI-NNI

802.1Q (source)

The source port processes


Ethernet frames according to
the Tag attribute. It adds the
S-VLAN tag that
corresponds to the QinQ link
to all the Ethernet frames, and
then transmits the Ethernet
frames to the sink port where
the QinQ link configured.

QinQ link (sink)

Model 3

PORT+C-VLAN
list (source)

QinQ (sink)

UNI-NNI

802.1Q (source)
QinQ (sink)

QinQ link (sink)

Model 4

PORT+S-VLAN
list (source)

UNI-UNI

QinQ (source)
QinQ (sink)

PORT+S-VLAN
list (sink)

The source port processes


Ethernet frames according to
the Tag attribute. It adds the
S-VLAN tag that
corresponds to the C-VLAN
to all the Ethernet frames, and
then transmits the Ethernet
frames to the sink port where
the QinQ link configured.
The source port transmits the
Ethernet frames that carry a
specific S-VLAN tag
(corresponding to the source
QinQ) to the sink port to
which the sink QinQ is
connected.

Typical Application
Figure 8-18 shows the typical application of service model 1.
Service 1 and service 2 contain tagged frames and untagged frames. Service 1 is transmitted to
NE1 through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN
tag to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are
then transmitted to Port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

150

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-18 Typical application of service model 1


NE 1
Port 1

NE 2

E-Line

Service 1
Service 2

E-Lin

Port 2
Strip S-VLAN Label

Transmission
Network

Port 3

E-Lin

Add S-VLAN Label

Port 1

E-Line

Port 3

Add S-VLAN Label

Service 1
Service 2

Port 2

Strip S-VLAN Label

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

Data(1)

S-VLAN(300)

Data(1)

Data(1)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

Data(2)

Figure 8-19 shows the typical application of service model 2.


Service 1 and service 2 carry different unknown C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1
through port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag
to service 1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then
transmitted to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 8-19 Typical application of service model 2
Strip S-VLAN Label

Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN

Data(1)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

NE 1
Service 1
Unknown CVLAN
Service 2
Unknown CVLAN

Port 1

Port 2

NE 2

E-Line
E-Lin

Port 3

Transmission
Network

E-Line

Port 3

E-Lin
e

Add S-VLAN Label

Port 1

Port 2

Service 1
Unknown CVLAN
Service 2
Unknown CVLAN

Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN

Data(1)

C-VLAN

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

C-VLAN

Data(2)

Figure 8-20 shows the typical application of service model 3.


Service 1 and service 2 carry different C-VLAN tags. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through
port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 adds an S-VLAN tag to service
1, and port 2 adds another S-VLAN tag to service 2. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted
to port 3. Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

151

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-20 Typical application of service model 3


Strip S-VLAN Label

Add S-VLAN Label

C-VLAN(100)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(1)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

NE 1
Service 1
VLAN ID: 100
Service 2
VLAN ID: 200

Port 1

Port 2

NE 2

E-Line
E-Lin

Transmission
Network

Port 3

Port 1

E-Line

Port 3

Service 2
Port 2 VLAN ID: 200

E-Lin
e

Add S-VLAN Label

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Strip S-VLAN Label

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(1)

C-VLAN(100)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

C-VLAN(200)

Data(2)

Figure 8-21 shows the typical application of service model 4.


Service 1 and service 2 carry the same S-VLAN tag. Service 1 is transmitted to NE1 through
port 1, and service 2 is transmitted to NE1 through port 2. Port 1 changes the S-VLAN tag carried
in service 1 and port 2 changes the S-VLAN tag carried in service 2 so that the service 1 and
service 2 carry different S-VLAN tags. Service 1 and service 2 are then transmitted to port 3.
Port 3 transmits service 1 and service 2 to NE2.
NE2 processes service 1 and service 2 in the same manner as NE1.
Figure 8-21 Typical application of service model 4
Switching S-VLAN Label
S-VLAN(100)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(300)

Data(1)

S-VLAN(100)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

NE 1
Service 1
S-VLAN ID: 100

Port 1

Service 2
S-VLAN ID: 100 Port 2

E-Line

NE 2
Port 3

Transmission
Network

Port 3

E-Line

E-Lin
e

e
E-Lin

Port 1

Service 1
S-VLAN ID: 100

Service 2
Port 2 S-VLAN ID: 100

Switching S-VLAN Label


S-VLAN(300)

Data( 1)

S-VLAN(100)

Data(1)

S-VLAN(400)

Data(2)

S-VLAN(100)

Data(2)

8.6.2.4 IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services that are forwarded based only on the MAC address
table are called IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-19 shows the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

152

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-19 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model


Service Type

Tag Type

Encapsulation
Type at a Port

Logical Port
Type

Learning
Mode

Switching
Sub-domain

IEEE 802.1D
bridge-based ELAN service

TagTransparent

Null

PORT

SVL

None

Typical Application
Figure 8-22 shows a typical application of the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services from NodeB 1 and NodeB 2 converge at NE1 and then are transmitted to the radio
network controller (RNC). The services do not need to be separated; therefore, an IEEE 802.1D
bridge is used at NE1 to schedule services.
Figure 8-22 IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service model
NE 2
Port 1

Port 2

NodeB 1

802.1d
bridge

NE 1
Port 1

Port 2

Transmission Network

Port 3
RNC

NE 3

802.1d
bridge

Port 1
Port 2

NodeB 2
802.1d
bridge

8.6.2.5 IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


You can use VLANs to separate Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services and divide an
IEEE 802.1Q bridge into multiple independent switching sub-domains. E-LAN services
separated in this manner are called IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.

Service Model
Table 8-20 provides information about the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

153

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-20 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model


Service Type

Tag Type

Encapsulation
Type at a Port

Logical Port
Type

Learning
Mode

Switching
Sub-domain

IEEE 802.1Q
bridge-based ELAN service

C-Aware

IEEE 802.1Q

PORT+VLAN

Independent
VLAN learning
(IVL)

A bridge divided
into switching
sub-domains by
VLAN

NOTE

The maximum number of VLANs supported by the configured for all the Ethernet services is fixed to 1024. If
more than 1024 VLANs are bound to a V-UNI, the logical type of the V-UNI must be PORT, and a VLAN
filtering table must be created to restrict ELAN services transmitted from the V-UNI.

Typical Application
Figure 8-23 shows a typical application of the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Services 1, 2, 3, and 4 from four NodeBs converge through a transmission network to a radio
network controller (RNC).
l

Services 1 and 2 have the same VLAN ID of 100, and services 3 and 4 have the same VLAN
ID of 200.

Because the VLAN ID of services 1 and 2 is different from that of services 3 and 4, IEEE
802.1Q bridges are configured: one each for NE 1, NE 2, and NE 3. The bridges are divided
into switching sub-domains by VLAN for service isolation over each bridge.

Figure 8-23 IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service model


NE 2 VLAN 100

NodeB 1

Service 1, 2
VLAN ID: 100
Service 3, 4
VLAN ID: 200
Port 1

Service 1
VLAN ID: 100

Port 2

Port 1

NE 1 VLAN 100

VLAN 200

Port 3

RNC
802.1q bridge

Port 3

Port 2
Domain 1
(VLAN ID: 100)

802.1q bridge

Transmission Network
NE
NE 3 VLAN 200
2
Port 2

Port 1
Domain 2
(VLAN ID: 200)

Service 2
VLAN ID: 100
NodeB 2

NodeB 3

Service 3
VLAN ID: 200

Port 3

802.1q bridge

NodeB 4

Service 4
VLAN ID: 200

8.6.2.6 802.1ad Bridge-based E-LAN Services


S-VLANs can be used to divide a bridge into sub-switching domains. Services from different
users are separated when they are transmitted in different sub-switching domains. These services
are called 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

154

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Service Model
Table 8-21 shows the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model.
Table 8-21 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model
Service Model

TAG Attribute

Learning
Mode

Sub-switching
Domain

Logical Port
Type

Encapsulation
Mode at a Port

802.1ad bridgebased E-LAN


service

S-Aware

IVL

A bridge is
divided into subswitching
domains based
on S-VLAN
tags.

PORT (UNI
port)

Null or 802.1Q

PORT+CVLAN list (UNI


port)

802.1Q

PORT+SVLAN list (NNI


port)

QinQ

NOTE

The maximum number of VLANs supported by the configured for all the Ethernet services is fixed to 1024. If
more than 1024 VLANs are bound to a V-UNI, the logical type of the V-UNI must be PORT, and a VLAN
filtering table must be created to restrict ELAN services transmitted from the V-UNI.

Typical Application
Figure 8-24 shows the typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model.
NE2 and N3 receive services G and H and send them to the convergence node NE1. Services G
and H carry a same C-VLAN tag, so S-VLAN tags are added for differentiating and separating
these services.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

155

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-24 Typical application of the 802.1ad bridge-based E-LAN service model
NE 2
Add S-VLAN tag

Strip S-VLAN tag

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(G)

C-VLAN(100)

Data( G)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

NE 2
SVLAN 300

Port 1
User G2
CVLAN 100

Port 3
SVLAN 400

NE 1
Transmission
Network

SVLAN 300

Port 1
User G1

CVLAN 100

Port 3

802.1ad
bridge

CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400

User H1

Port 2
User H2

NE 3

Port 2

CVLAN 100

Port 4
802.1ad
bridge

SVLAN 300

Transmission
Network

Port 1
User G3
CVLAN 100
SVLAN 400

Port 3

NE 1

Port 2
User H3
CVLAN 100

Add S-VLAN tag

Strip S-VLAN tag


C-VLAN(100)

Data( G)

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(G)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

802.1ad
bridge
NE 3

Add S-VLAN tag

Strip S-VLAN tag

S-VLAN(300)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(G)

C-VLAN(100)

Data( G)

S-VLAN(400)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

C-VLAN(100)

Data(H)

NOTE

You can also configure 8.6.2.3 QinQ-Based E-Line Services on NE2 and NE3 for service access.

8.6.3 Configuration Process


The service configuration process differs according to the specific service type.
8.6.3.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line
Services)
This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information of a transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet service (E-Line) and
the process of verifying the service configurations.
8.6.3.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line
Service)
This section describes the process of configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point ELine service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service
information and QoS and verifying service configurations.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

156

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.6.3.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information for a VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) service and the process of verifying
the service configurations.
8.6.3.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Service)
This section describes the process of configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-toend manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service information and QoS and verifying
service configurations.
8.6.3.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)
This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)
service and the process of verifying the service configurations.
8.6.3.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-Based E-LAN Service)
This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service
in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS
and verifying service configurations.
8.6.3.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)
This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)
service and the process of verifying the service configurations.
8.6.3.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service)
This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service
in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS
and verifying service configurations.

8.6.3.1 Per-NE Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point ELine Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information of a transparently transmitted point-to-point Ethernet service (E-Line) and
the process of verifying the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-25 shows the flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line
services.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

157

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-25 Flowchart for configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services

Required

Start

Optional
Delete an E-LAN
Service

Configure LAGs.

Configure E-Line
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.
Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Deleting an E-LAN Service


Table 8-22 Process of deleting an E-LAN Service

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN


Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you
need to delete the default services manually before you configure
transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

158

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAGs
Table 8-23 Process of configuring LAGs
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.

Configuring Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Services


Table 8-24 Process of configuring transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-toPoint Transparently


Transmitted E-Line Service

Required.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-25 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

159

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-26 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Remarks

Testing Ethernet Services


Configured on a Per NE Basis

The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an


Ethernet OAM test.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-27 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.3.2 End-to-End Configuration Process (Transparently Transmitted Point-toPoint E-Line Service)


This section describes the process of configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point ELine service in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service
information and QoS and verifying service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-26 shows the flowchart for configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point ELine service.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

160

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-26 Flowchart for configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service

Required

Start

Optional
Delete an E-LAN
Service

Configure LAGs.

Configure E-Line
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.
Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Deleting the Existing E-LAN Service


Table 8-28 Process of deleting the existing E-LAN service

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN


Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is
configured on the OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you need to delete
the E-LAN service before configuring a transparently
transmitted point-to-point E-Line service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

161

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAGs
Table 8-29 Process of configuring LAGs
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.

Configuring a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service


Table 8-30 Process of configuring a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service
Operation

Remarks

8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable


by Using the Search Method

Optical. Perform this operation to create microwave links


or Ethernet fibers/cables for the service path if they have
not been created on the topology of the U2000.

8.9.4.2 Creating a
Transparently Transmitted
Point-to-Point E-Line Service

Required.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-31 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

162

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Verifying Service Configurations


Table 8-32 Process of verifying the service configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.6.4.9 End-toEnd
Configuration
Procedure
(Verifying
Service
Configurations
)

Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet


service.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-33 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.3.3 Per-NE Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information for a VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) service and the process of verifying
the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-27 shows the flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

163

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-27 Flowchart for configuring VLAN-based E-Line services

Required

Start

Optional
Delete an E-LAN
Service

Configure LAGs.

Configure E-Line
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.
Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Deleting an E-LAN Service


Table 8-34 Process of deleting an E-LAN Service

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN


Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you
need to delete the default services manually before you configure
transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

164

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAGs
Table 8-35 Process of configuring LAGs
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.

Configuring VLAN-based E-Line Services


Table 8-36 Process of configuring VLAN-based E-Line services
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.9 Deleting
an E-LAN
Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.

8.9.3.4
Creating a
VLAN-based
E-Line Service

Required.

NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area
network (E-LAN) services by default, you need to delete the default services
manually before you configure VLAN-based E-Line services on it.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-37 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

165

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-38 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Remarks

Testing Ethernet Services


Configured on a Per NE Basis

The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an


Ethernet OAM test.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-39 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.3.4 End-to-End Configuration Process (VLAN-based E-Line Service)


This section describes the process of configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-toend manner. The process includes configuring E-Line service information and QoS and verifying
service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-28 shows the flowchart for configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

166

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-28 Flowchart for configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service

Required

Start

Optional
Delete an E-LAN
Service

Configure LAGs.

Configure E-Line
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.
Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Deleting the Existing E-LAN Service


Table 8-40 Process of deleting the existing E-LAN service

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN


Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is
configured on the OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you need to delete
the E-LAN service before configuring a transparently
transmitted point-to-point E-Line service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

167

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring LAGs
Table 8-41 Process of configuring LAGs
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.

Configuring a VLAN-based E-Line Service


Table 8-42 Process of configuring a VLAN-based E-Line service
Operation

Remarks

8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable


by Using the Search Method

Perform this operation to create microwave links or


Ethernet fibers/cables for the service path if they have
not been created on the topology of the U2000.

8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based


E-Line Service

Required.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-43 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

168

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Verifying Service Configurations


Table 8-44 Process of verifying the service configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.6.5.7 End-toEnd
Configuration
Procedure
(Verifying
Service
Configurations
)

Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet


service.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-45 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.3.5 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)
service and the process of verifying the service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-29 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

169

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-29 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services

Start

Required

Change the ports mounted with


E-LAN services.

Optional
Configure Ethernet Protection

Configure E-LAN services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet services.

Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Removing the Ports Mounted with E-LAN Services


Table 8-46 Process of removing the ports mounted with E-LAN services

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to


a Bridge

Optional. This operation removes the ports to


be created as slave ports of LAGs from the
ports that the system configures by default as
ports mounted with E-LAN services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

170

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring Ethernet Protection


Table 8-47 Process of configuring ethernet protection
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use


LAGs.

8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance

Required.

Configuring IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-48 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE


802.1D Bridge-based ELAN Service

Optional.
NOTE
IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services are configured for the OptiX
RTN 380 by default. This step is required only when IEEE 802.1D
bridge-based services need to be reconfigured for the OptiX RTN
380.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-49 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

171

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-50 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Remarks

Testing Ethernet Services


Configured on a Per NE Basis

The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an


Ethernet OAM test.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-51 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.3.6 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-Based E-LAN


Service)
This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service
in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS
and verifying service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-30 shows the flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

172

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-30 Flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service

Start

Required

Change the ports mounted with


E-LAN services.

Optional
Configure Ethernet Protection

Configure E-LAN services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet services.

Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Changing the Ports Mounted with E-LAN Services


Table 8-52 Process of changing the Ports Mounted with E-LAN Services

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.7
Changing
Logical Ports
Mounted to a
Bridge

Optional. This operation removes the ports to be created as slave ports of


LAGs from the ports that the system configures by default as ports
mounted with E-LAN services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

173

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring Ethernet Protection


Table 8-53 Process of configuring ethernet protection
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1
Creating a
LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.

8.9.3.2
Creating an
ERPS Instance

Required when Ethernet services need to use ERPS.

Configuring an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service


Table 8-54 Process of configuring an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service
Operation

Remarks

8.9.4.1
Searching for
Native
Ethernet
Services

Required.

8.9.1.7
Creating a
Fiber/Cable by
Using the
Search Method

Perform this operation to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/cables


for the service path if they have not been created on the topology of the
U2000.

8.9.4.4
Creating an
IEEE 802.1D
Bridge-based
E-LAN Service

Optional.

NOTE
IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services are configured for the OptiX RTN 380 by
default. This step is required only when IEEE 802.1D bridge-based services need to
be reconfigured for the OptiX RTN 380.

If the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service configured by default is


deleted, perform this operation to configure a new IEEE 802.1D bridgebased E-LAN service in an end-to-end manner.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-55 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

174

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Verifying Service Configurations


Table 8-56 Process of verifying the service configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.6.6.9 End-toEnd
Configuration
Procedure
(Ethernet
Service
Verification)

Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet


service.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-57 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.3.7 Per-NE Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services)


This section describes the processes of configuring the service information, and quality of service
(QoS) information for an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)
service and the process of verifying the service configurations.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

175

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Flowchart
Figure 8-31 shows the flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services.
Figure 8-31 Flowchart for configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services

Required

Start

Optional
Delete an E-LAN
Service
Configure Ethernet
Protection
Configure E-LAN
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.
Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

176

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Deleting an E-LAN Service


Table 8-58 Process of deleting an E-LAN Service
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN


Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
Because an OptiX RTN 380 carries IEEE 802.1D bridge-based
Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services by default, you
need to delete the default services manually before you configure
transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services on it.

Configuring Ethernet Protection


Table 8-59 Process of configuring ethernet protection
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use


LAGs.

8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance

Required.

Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Services


Table 8-60 Process of configuring IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN services
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.6 Creating an
IEEE 802.1Q Bridgebased E-LAN Service

Required.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-61 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

177

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Verifying Ethernet Service Configurations


Table 8-62 Process of verifying Ethernet service configurations
Operation

Remarks

Testing Ethernet Services


Configured on a Per NE Basis

The connectivity of Ethernet services is verified using an


Ethernet OAM test.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-63 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.3.8 End-to-End Configuration Process (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN


Service)
This section describes the process of configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service
in an end-to-end manner. The process includes configuring E-LAN service information and QoS
and verifying service configurations.

Flowchart
Figure 8-32 shows the flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

178

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-32 Flowchart for configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service

Required

Start

Optional
Delete an E-LAN
Service
Configure Ethernet
Protection
Configure E-LAN
services.

Configure QoS.

Verify Ethernet
services.
Synchronize 1+1
configurations.

End

The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.

Deleting the Existing E-LAN Service


Table 8-64 Process of deleting the existing E-LAN service

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.9 Deleting
an E-LAN
Service

Required when an NE is being initially configured.


NOTE
By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on the OptiX
RTN 380. Therefore, you need to delete the E-LAN service before configuring an
IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

179

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configuring Ethernet Protection


Table 8-65 Process of configuring ethernet protection
Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.1
Creating a
LAG

Required when Ethernet ports need to use LAGs.

8.9.3.2
Creating an
ERPS Instance

Required when Ethernet services need to use ERPS.

Configuring an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service


Table 8-66 Process of configuring an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service
Operation

Remarks

8.9.1.7
Creating a
Fiber/Cable by
Using the
Search Method

Perform this operation to create microwave links or Ethernet fibers/cables


for the service path if they have not been created on the topology of the
U2000.

8.9.4.5
Creating an
IEEE 802.1Q
Bridge-based
E-LAN Service

Required.
Set parameters according to the service plan and parameter plan.

Configuring QoS
Table 8-67 Process of configuring QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.10 Modifying the


Mapping for a DS Domain

Required if the default mappings for the Differentiated


Services (DS) domain are inapplicable.

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet


Type Trusted by a Port

Required if the priority type of an Ethernet service is not


CVLAN, which is the default packet type trusted by the
DiffServ domain.

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling
DSCP Demapping at an Egress
Port

If DSCP-based DiffServ is enabled and if you do not want


the DSCP values to be changed by demapping at egress
ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

180

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Operation

Remarks

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue


Scheduling Policies

Required if a port is required to schedule traffic according


to a certain queue scheduling policy in the case of traffic
congestion. The default queue scheduling mode is SP
+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR for
weighted round robin). AF1 to AF4 queues are WRR
queues (allocated the same weight) and the other queues
are SP queues.

Verifying Service Configurations


Table 8-68 Process of verifying the service configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.6.7.7 End-toEnd
Configuration
Procedure
(Verifying
Service
Configurations
)

Perform an Ethernet OAM test to verify the connectivity of the Ethernet


service.

Synchronizing 1+1 Configurations


Table 8-69 Process of synchronizing 1+1 configurations
Operation

Remarks

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data


Between Main and Standby
NEs (1+1)

Optional. When 1+1 links carry Ethernet services,


perform this operation to synchronize service
configurations on the active NE to the standby NE.

8.6.4 Configuration Example (Transparently Transmitted Point-toPoint E-Line Services)


This section uses a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service as an example to
describe how to configure Ethernet services according to the network plan.
8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.6.4.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Protection)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

181

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.


8.6.4.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
8.6.4.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.4.5 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification)
This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)
This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.
8.6.4.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information.
8.6.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.4.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)
This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.

8.6.4.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
As shown in Figure 8-33, a hop of large-capacity OptiX RTN 380 equipment replace optical
fibers to form a ring network with OptiX optical transmission equipment. Configure Ethernet
services according to the following requirements:
Table 8-70 Service requirements

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Requirement Description

Requirement Satisfaction

Servic
e
access
capaci
ty

The Ethernet service capacity


on a ring network does not
exceed 3 Gbit/s. Microwave
links need to transparently
transmit Ethernet services.

Servic
e
protec
tion

l NE 1 and NE 2 provide three GE ports (two


optical ports and one electrical port) for
receiving Ethernet services, configuring a
load sharing link aggregation group (LAG),
and configuring transparently transmitted
point-to-point E-Line services.

Links between the OptiX optical


l NE91 and NE92 each provides three GE ports
transmission equipment and the
(two optical ports and one electrical port) that
OptiX RTN 380 equipment
work in auto-negotiation mode. A loadneed protection.
sharing LAG is configured for the ports, with
the electrical GE ports as the main ports.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

182

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Requirement Description

Requirement Satisfaction

QoS

Configure DiffServ and perform service


scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP
values.

The priorities of Ethernet


services transmitted over a
microwave network are
identified by DSCP values. All
the NEs on the microwave
network have the same mapping
between PHBs and DSCP
values for Ethernet services.

Figure 8-33 Networking diagram for transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line services

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).

8.6.4.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

183

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation
Table 8-71 LAG plan
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Static (default value)

Configure the same aggregation


type at both ends. Static aggregation
is recommended.

Load sharing mode

Sharing

Configure the same load sharing


mode at both ends. Configure a load
non-sharing LAG to provide
protection, and a load sharing LAG
to increase bandwidth.

System priority

32768 (default value)

The default value is recommended.


The system priority can be set only
in static aggregation.

Master and slave ports

l Master port: P&E

It is recommended that you set the


main and slave ports consistently for
the equipment at both ends.

LAG type

l Slave port: COMBO and GE(o)


Minimum number of active links

To trigger switching upon failure of


a member link in a LAG when LAG
exists with other types of protection,
set the minimum number of active
links to the total number of links in
the LAG. Otherwise, retain the
default value of 1.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete an E-LAN Service.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

184

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Create a LAG.

----End

8.6.4.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Data Preparation

Procedure
Step 1 Create a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service.
NE1 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

185

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.4.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Mapping between DSCP


values, PHBs, and queue
scheduling modes

See the following figure.

l DiffServ configuration
should be the same for
each service port.
l If the type of packets
trusted by service ports is
DSCP, enabling DSCP
demapping function for
egress ports of a DS
domain is not required, as
the DSCP demapping
function may change
DSCP values.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

186

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

187

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

188

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.4.5 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Data Preparation
NOTE

This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1
and NE2.

Procedure
Step 1 Create an MD.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

189

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Create an MA.

Step 3 Create an MEP.

Step 4 Create a remote MEP.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

190

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 5 LB test.
Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose
ID is 2 as the sink MP.

l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful.


l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in
the following table.
Cause

Handling Procedure

Connecting to the peer end fails within the


specified period.

Check whether services are interrupted.

Packets are lost.

Check whether the service traffic is higher


than the transmission bandwidth.
Check the link for bit errors.

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

191

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.6.4.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.

Data Preparation
Table 8-72 LAG plan
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

LAG type

Static (default value)

Configure the same aggregation


type at both ends. Static aggregation
is recommended.

Load sharing mode

Sharing

Configure the same load sharing


mode at both ends. Configure a load
non-sharing LAG to provide
protection, and a load sharing LAG
to increase bandwidth.

System priority

32768 (default value)

The default value is recommended.


The system priority can be set only
in static aggregation.

Master and slave ports

l Master port: P&E

It is recommended that you set the


main and slave ports consistently for
the equipment at both ends.

l Slave port: COMBO and GE(o)


Minimum number of active links

To trigger switching upon failure of


a member link in a LAG when LAG
exists with other types of protection,
set the minimum number of active
links to the total number of links in
the LAG. Otherwise, retain the
default value of 1.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete the E-LAN service.
NE1 is used as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

192

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Configure a LAG.

----End

8.6.4.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information.

Data Preparation
Data

Value in This Example

Planning Guidelines

Service information

l Service name: NE1toNE2

l Set names for E-Line


services according to the
network plan.

l Source: NE1 (P&E)


l Sink: NE2 (P&E)

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

l Leave the VLAN IDs


empty for the source and
sink NEs of transparently
transmitted point-to-point
E-Line services.
193

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data

Value in This Example

Planning Guidelines

Port information

Retain the default settings for


all ports.

l Enable ports.
l Set Encapsulation Type
to null.
l It is recommended that
you set Working Mode
to Autonegotiation.

Prerequisites
Ethernet fibers/cables and microwave links have been searched out in the operation of 8.4
Configuring the Network Topology.

Procedure
Step 1 Create a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service.

----End

8.6.4.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

194

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Mapping between DSCP


values, PHBs, and queue
scheduling modes

See the following figure.

l DiffServ configuration
should be the same for
each service port.
l If the type of packets
trusted by service ports is
DSCP, enabling DSCP
demapping function for
egress ports of a DS
domain is not required, as
the DSCP demapping
function may change
DSCP values.

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

195

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

196

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

----End

8.6.4.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)


This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.

Context
In this example, ETH OAM is configured during the service information configuration.
Therefore, you can perform an LB test to verify service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Verify Ethernet service configurations.
The service NE1toNE2 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

197

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.5 Configuration Example (VLAN-based E-Line Services)


This section uses a VLAN-based E-Line service as an example to describe how to configure
Ethernet services according to the service plan.
8.6.5.1 Networking Diagram
The section describes the networking of NEs.
8.6.5.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
8.6.5.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.5.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification)
This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.5.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information.
8.6.5.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.5.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)
This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.

8.6.5.1 Networking Diagram


The section describes the networking of NEs.
Configure Ethernet services according to 8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on
a Chain Network) and the following requirements.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

198

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-73 Service requirements


Requirement Description

Requirement Satisfaction

Servic
e
access
capaci
ty

Configure a port working in


auto-negotiation mode for
receiving a channel of electrical
GE signals from NodeB 1.

NE 2 and NE 4 provide an electrical P&E port for


receiving services.

Servic
e
protec
tion

No

Servic
e
separa
tion

Separate services from NodeB 1


and RAN 1 from each other
using VLAN IDs:

Configure VLAN-based E-Line services on NE1,


NE2, NE3, and NE4.

Configure a port working in


auto-negotiation mode for
receiving a channel of electrical
GE signals from RAN 1.

l VLAN ID of NodeB 1: 100


l VLAN ID of RAN 1: 200

QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

The priorities of Ethernet


services transmitted over a
microwave network are
identified by DSCP values. All
the NEs on the microwave
network have the same mapping
between PHBs and DSCP
values for Ethernet services.

Configure DiffServ and perform service


scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP
values.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

199

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-34 Networking diagram for VLAN-based E-Line services

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).

8.6.5.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

200

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation

Procedure
Step 1 Delete an E-LAN Service.

Step 2 Create a VLAN-based E-Line Service.


NE1 is used as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

201

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.5.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Mapping between DSCP


values, PHBs, and queue
scheduling modes

See the following figure.

l DiffServ configuration
should be the same for
each service port.
l If the type of packets
trusted by service ports is
DSCP, enabling DSCP
demapping function for
egress ports of a DS
domain is not required, as
the DSCP demapping
function may change
DSCP values.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

202

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

203

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

204

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.5.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Data Preparation
NOTE

This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1
and NE2.

Procedure
Step 1 Create an MD.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

205

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Create an MA.

Step 3 Create an MEP.

Step 4 Create a remote MEP.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

206

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 5 LB test.
Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose
ID is 2 as the sink MP.

l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful.


l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in
the following table.
Cause

Handling Procedure

Connecting to the peer end fails within the


specified period.

Check whether services are interrupted.

Packets are lost.

Check whether the service traffic is higher


than the transmission bandwidth.
Check the link for bit errors.

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

207

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.6.5.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Configuring Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet service information.

Context
This section describes the procedure for configuring an Ethernet service between NodeB 1 and
the RNC in end-to-end mode. The procedure for configuring an Ethernet service between RAN
1 and the RNC is similar.

Data Preparation
Data

Value in This Example

Planning Guidelines

Service information

Service information
configured on NodeB 1:

l Set names for


networkwide E-Line
services according to the
network plan.

l Service name: NE1toNE4


l Source: NE1 (P&E)
l Sink: NE4 (P&E)
l VLAN ID: 100

l Set the same VLAN ID


for the source and sink
NEs.

Service information
configured on RAN 1:
l Service name: NE1toNE2
l Source: NE1 (P&E)
l Sink: NE2 (P&E)
l VLAN ID: 200
Port information

l Encapsulation Type:
802.1Q
l Working Mode:
Autonegotiation

l Enable ports.
l For a port that carries
VLAN-based E-Line
services, set
Encapsulation Type to
802.1Q.
l It is recommended that
you set Working Mode
to Autonegotiation.

Prerequisites
Ethernet fibers/cables and microwave links have been searched out in the operation of 8.4
Configuring the Network Topology.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete the E-LAN service.
NE1 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

208

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Create a VLAN-based E-Line service.


The RAN 1 service is used as an example.

----End

8.6.5.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

209

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Mapping between DSCP


values, PHBs, and queue
scheduling modes

See the following figure.

l DiffServ configuration
should be the same for
each service port.
l If the type of packets
trusted by service ports is
DSCP, enabling DSCP
demapping function for
egress ports of a DS
domain is not required, as
the DSCP demapping
function may change
DSCP values.

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

210

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

211

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

----End

8.6.5.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)


This section describes how to verify Ethernet service configurations.

Context
In this example, ETH OAM is configured during the service information configuration.
Therefore, you can perform an LB test to verify service configurations.

Procedure
Step 1 Verify Ethernet service configurations.
The service NE1toNE2 is used as an example.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

212

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.6 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN


Service)
This section provides an example of how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN
service according to the plan.
8.6.6.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.6.6.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)
This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.
8.6.6.3 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
8.6.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.6.5 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)
This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.6.6 End-to-EndConfiguration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)
This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.
8.6.6.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
8.6.6.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.6.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)
This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

8.6.6.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

213

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Configure Ethernet services according to 8.3.3 Microwave Ring Network and the following
requirements.
Table 8-74 Service requirements

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Requirement Description

Requirement Satisfaction

Servic
e
access
capaci
ty

Support the backhaul of one GE


electrical signal from NodeB 1
and NodeB 2 respectively. The
port mode is auto-negotiation.

l Configure IEEE 802.1D bridge-based


Ethernet local area network (E-LAN)
services.

Servic
e
protec
tion

Configure protection for


Ethernet services on ring
networks.

Servic
e
separa
tion

Ethernet services from NodeB 1


and NodeB 2 need to be
transparently transmitted.

Qualit
y of
servic
e
(QoS)

The priorities of Ethernet


services transmitted over a
microwave network are
identified by DSCP values. All
the NEs on the microwave
network have the same mapping
between PHBs and DSCP
values for Ethernet services.

l Configure Ethernet ring protection switching


(ERPS).

Configure DiffServ and perform service


scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP
values.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

214

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-35 Networking diagram for IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).

8.6.6.2 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

215

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation

Procedure
Step 1
NE2 is used as an example.

----End

8.6.6.3 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

216

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Context
NOTE

By default, IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services are configured on OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you do
not need to configure IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN services.

8.6.6.4 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Data Preparation

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

217

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

218

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

----End

8.6.6.5 Per-NE Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Data Preparation
NOTE

This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1
and NE2.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

219

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Create an MD.

Step 2 Create an MA.

Step 3 Create an MEP.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

220

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 4 Create a remote MEP.

Step 5 LB test.
Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose
ID is 2 as the sink MP.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

221

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful.


l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in
the following table.
Cause

Handling Procedure

Connecting to the peer end fails within the


specified period.

Check whether services are interrupted.

Packets are lost.

Check whether the service traffic is higher


than the transmission bandwidth.
Check the link for bit errors.

----End

8.6.6.6 End-to-EndConfiguration Procedure (Ethernet Protection)


This section describes the procedure for configuring Ethernet protection.

Data Preparation

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

222

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.6.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Context
NOTE

By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on the OptiX RTN 380. Therefore, you
only need to search out this service to add it.

Procedure
Step 1 Search for the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service (native Ethernet service).

----End

8.6.6.8 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

223

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

224

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

225

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.6.9 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Data Preparation
NOTE

This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1
and NE2.

NE1

NE2

Port: 1-MXUF4-2

Port: 1-MXUF4-2

Procedure
Step 1 Verify the Ethernet service configuration.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

226

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.7 Configuration Example (IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN


Services)
This section uses an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service as an example to describe how
to configure Ethernet services according to the service plan.
8.6.7.1 Networking Diagram
The section describes the networking of NEs.
8.6.7.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
8.6.7.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.7.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification)
This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.
8.6.7.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)
This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.
8.6.7.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)
This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).
8.6.7.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)
This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

8.6.7.1 Networking Diagram


The section describes the networking of NEs.
Configure Ethernet services according to 8.5.2 Configuration Example (Microwave Links on
a Chain Network) and the following requirements.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

227

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-75 Service requirements


Requirement Description

Requirement Satisfaction

Servic
e
access
capaci
ty

Configure a port working in


auto-negotiation mode for
receiving a channel of electrical
GE signals from NodeB 1.

The OptiX RTN 380 provides an electrical P&E


port for receiving services.

Servic
e
protec
tion

No

Servic
e
separa
tion

Separate services from NodeB 1


and RAN 1 from each other
using VLAN IDs:

Configure IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN


services for NE1, NE2, NE3, and NE4.

Configure a port working in


auto-negotiation mode for
receiving a channel of electrical
GE signals from RAN 1.

l VLAN ID of NodeB 1: 100


l VLAN ID of RAN 1: 200

QoS

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

The priorities of Ethernet


services transmitted over a
microwave network are
identified by DSCP values. All
the NEs on the microwave
network have the same mapping
between PHBs and DSCP
values for Ethernet services.

Configure DiffServ and perform service


scheduling and forwarding based on DSCP
values.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

228

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-36 Networking diagram for IEEE 802.1q bridge-based E-LAN services

NOTE

On the NMS, the logical port of a microwave port is 1-MXUF4-1(IF).

On the NMS, the logical port of a P&E port is 1-MXUF4-2(P&E).

On the NMS, the logical port of a COMBO port is 1-MXUF4-3(COMBO).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE optical interface is 1-MXUF4-4(GE(o)).

On the NMS, the logical port of a GE electrical interface is 1-MXUF4-5(GE(e)).

8.6.7.2 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

229

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation

Procedure
Step 1 Deleting an E-LAN Service.

Step 2 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service.


NE2 is used as an example.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

230

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.7.3 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Mapping between DSCP


values, PHBs, and queue
scheduling modes

See the following figure.

l DiffServ configuration
should be the same for
each service port.
l If the type of packets
trusted by service ports is
DSCP, enabling DSCP
demapping function for
egress ports of a DS
domain is not required, as
the DSCP demapping
function may change
DSCP values.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

231

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

232

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

233

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.6.7.4 Procedure of Configuration on a Per-NE Basis (Ethernet Service Verification)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Data Preparation
NOTE

This section describes how to test the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1
and NE2.

Procedure
Step 1 Create an MD.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

234

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Create an MA.

Step 3 Create an MEP.

Step 4 Create a remote MEP.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

235

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 5 LB test.
Perform an LB test by considering the MP whose ID is 1 as the source MP and the MP whose
ID is 2 as the sink MP.

l If the value of LossRate in Result is 0, the test is successful.


l If the value of LossRate in Result is not 0, handle the problem based on the procedures in
the following table.
Cause

Handling Procedure

Connecting to the peer end fails within the


specified period.

Check whether services are interrupted.

Packets are lost.

Check whether the service traffic is higher


than the transmission bandwidth.
Check the link for bit errors.

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

236

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.6.7.5 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Service Information)


This section describes the procedure for configuring service information.

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Service name

E-LAN-00001

Service information

See the following picture.

l Set IDs and names for


networkwide E-LAN
services according to the
network plan.

Prerequisites
Ethernet fibers/cables and microwave links have been searched out in the operation of 8.4
Configuring the Network Topology.

Procedure
Step 1 Delete the existing E-LAN service.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

237

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Create an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service.

----End

8.6.7.6 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (QoS)


This section describes the procedure for configuring quality of service (QoS).

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

238

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Data Preparation
Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principle

Mapping between DSCP


values, PHBs, and queue
scheduling modes

See the following figure.

l DiffServ configuration
should be the same for
each service port.
l If the type of packets
trusted by service ports is
DSCP, enabling DSCP
demapping function for
egress ports of a DS
domain is not required, as
the DSCP demapping
function may change
DSCP values.

Procedure
Step 1 Modify the mapping for a DS domain.
NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

239

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Change the packet type trusted by a port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Step 3 Disable DSCP demapping at an egress port.


NE1 is used as an example:

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

240

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 4 Set egress queue scheduling policies.


NE1 is used as an example:

----End

8.6.7.7 End-to-End Configuration Procedure (Verifying Service Configurations)


This section describes the procedure for verifying Ethernet service configurations.

Data Preparation
NOTE

In this example, the connectivity of the Ethernet service over the microwave link between NE1 and NE2 is
tested.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

241

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NE1

NE2

Port: 1-MXUF4-2

Port: 1-MXUF4-2

Procedure
Step 1 Verify service configurations.

----End

8.7 Configuring CPRI Services


The OptiX RTN 380 supports transparent transmission of CPRI services.
8.7.1 Configuration Process (CPRI Services)
The configuration process comprises configuring and verifying CPRI services.
8.7.2 Configuration Example (CPRI Services)
In this example, the microwave link data has been configured.

8.7.1 Configuration Process (CPRI Services)


The configuration process comprises configuring and verifying CPRI services.
Figure 8-37 shows the process of configuring CPRI services.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

242

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-37 Flowchart


Required

Start

Optional
Delete Ethernet
services.

Configure CPRI
services.
Verifying CPRI
services.

End

NOTE

l This document describes the CPRI service configurations only for the OptiX RTN 380.
l Before configuring CRPI services, you must have finished configuring proper microwave links for the
CPRI services.

The operations in the configuration flowchart are described as follows.


Table 8-76 Flowchart for configuring CPRI services
Step

Operation

Remarks

Deleting E-LAN
Services or Deleting ELine Services

Required.
An NE can only transmit CPRI services or
Ethernet services at a time. Delete the existing
Ethernet services before you configure CPRI
services.

Configuring CPRI
Services

Required.

Verifying CPRI Service


Configurations

The test result should show that the microwave


link correctly transmits the CPRI services.

8.7.2 Configuration Example (CPRI Services)


In this example, the microwave link data has been configured.
8.7.2.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.7.2.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedure for configuring data.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

243

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.7.2.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
On a network shown in Figure 8-38, the OptiX RTN 380s need to transparently transmit one
1.25 Gbit/s CPRI service. A hop of microwave link with 1+0 protection is already configured
between the two OptiX RTN 380s. For the microwave link, the channel spacing is set to 500
MHz, the modulation scheme is 16QAM, and the AMAC function is disabled.
Figure 8-38 Networking diagram (transparently transmitting CPRI services)

8.7.2.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring data.

Data Preparation
Figure 8-39 Microwave link configurations for transmitting CPRI services

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

244

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Configure CPRI services.

Step 2 Verifying CPRI service configurations.


----End

8.8 Configuring Clocks


To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure
the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy.
8.8.1 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock)
This section describes the process of configuring the clock source, clock protection, and output
clock.
8.8.2 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain Network)
This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave chain network.
8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network)
This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave ring network.

8.8.1 Configuration Process (Configuring a Clock)


This section describes the process of configuring the clock source, clock protection, and output
clock.
Figure 8-40 shows the flowchart for configuring a clock.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

245

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-40 Flowchart for configuring a clock

Required
Optional

Start

Configure the clock


source.

Configure SSM or
extended SSM protection.

Query the clock


synchronization status.

End

The steps in the configuration flowchart are described as follows:


Table 8-77 Process of configuring the clock

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Step

Operation

Remarks

8.9.6.1 Configuring the


System Clock Source

Required. Set parameters as follows:


Set Clock Source according to clock source
planning information.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

246

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step

Operation

Remarks

8.9.6.2 Configuring
Protection for Clock
Sources

Required when the SSM or extended SSM


protection is used. Set parameters as follows:
l Set Protection Status according to the used
protocol type.
l If the clock uses the extended SSM
protection, set Clock Source ID for the
following clock sources:
Internal clock source of the NE that
connects the intersecting ring and chain or
connects the intersecting rings
Line clock source that is accessed to the
ring through the NE that connects the
intersecting ring and chain or connects the
intersecting rings and is configured with
the line clock source on the ring
The values of Clock Source ID for these
clock sources should be different.

6.6 Checking the Clock


Status

Optional.

8.8.2 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Chain


Network)
This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave chain network.
8.8.2.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.8.2.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedure for configuring clock on a microwave chain network.

8.8.2.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Configure the clock for the network shown in Figure 8-41 according to 8.5.2 Configuration
Example (Microwave Links on a Chain Network) and the following requirements:
l

Synchronize the microwave chain network with the clock of the RNC.

Provide clock signals to NodeB 1 and RAN 1 through P&E ports.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

247

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-41 Networking diagram for a microwave chain network

8.8.2.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring clock on a microwave chain network.

Data Preparation

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principles

Clock source information

See the following figure.

You need to configure an


Ethernet clock source for
each link.

Clock protection

Not in use.

In this example, a chain


network is set up. Therefore,
only priority-based clock
source protection is used and
the standard SSM or
extended SSM protection is
not used.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

248

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-42 Data Planning

NOTE

The following procedure takes configuring clocks on NE1 as an example. Configuring clocks on other NEs
is similar.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the clock source.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

249

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Query the clock synchronization status.


NE Clock Mode must be Tracing Mode for all NEs.

----End

8.8.3 Configuration Example (Clock on a Microwave Ring Network)


This section describes how to configure clocks on a microwave ring network.
8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram
This section describes the networking of NEs.
8.8.3.2 Configuration Procedure
This section describes the procedure for configuring clocks.

8.8.3.1 Networking Diagram


This section describes the networking of NEs.
Configure clocks according to the following requirements. Figure 8-43 shows the networking
diagram.
l

The microwave ring network is directly synchronized with the clock of the radio network
controller (RNC).

Clock synchronization signals are transmitted to each NodeB through the P&E port.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

250

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-43 Networking diagram (clocks on a microwave ring network)

8.8.3.2 Configuration Procedure


This section describes the procedure for configuring clocks.

Data Preparation

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Item

Value in This Example

Planning Principles

Clock source information

See the following figure.

Clock protection

Standard SSM

In this example, a ring


network is set up. Therefore,
the standard SSM or
extended SSM protection is
used.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

251

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Figure 8-44 Data Planning

NOTE

The following procedure takes configuring clocks on NE1 as an example. Configuring clocks on other NEs
is similar.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure the clock sources.

Step 2 Configure protection for the clock sources.


Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

252

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 3 Query the clock synchronization status.


NE Clock Mode must be Tracing Mode for all NEs.

----End

8.9 Common Service Configuration Operations


This section provides hyperlinks to common service configuration operations.
8.9.1 Configuring the Network Topology
This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of network topology configuration.
8.9.2 Configuring Microwave Links
This section provides videos to common operations of microwave link configuration.
8.9.3 Configuring Ethernet Services on a Per-NE Basis
This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services on a
per-NE basis.
8.9.4 Configuring Ethernet Services (in End-to-End Mode)
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

253

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services in an


end-to-end mode.
8.9.5 Configuring CPRI Services
This section describes how to configure CPRI services. You must delete Ethernet service
configurations before configuring CPRI services.
8.9.6 Configuring Clocks
To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure
the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy.

8.9.1 Configuring the Network Topology


This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of network topology configuration.
8.9.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method
The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address
of the gateway NE, the network segment of the gateway NE IP address, or the NSAP addresses.
In addition, the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method
of manually creating NEs, this search method creates NEs faster and more reliably.
8.9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually
If you create NEs manually, you can create them one by one instead of in batches.
8.9.1.3 Changing an NE ID
Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This
task does not interrupt services.
8.9.1.4 Changing an NE Name
For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical
location or the device to which it is connected.
8.9.1.5 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN
The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from
the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements
of the transmission network for managing messages.
8.9.1.6 Configuring Access Control
When an NE is connected to the network management system (NMS) using an Ethernet service
port, you must configure access control.
8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method
The network management system (NMS) can find the fibers connected to a specified microwave
port or Ethernet port by using the search method. This method is the most common method for
creating microwave links.
8.9.1.8 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually
You can create a fiber by specifying the ports connected by the fiber. This method can be used
to create both microwave links and Ethernet links.

8.9.1.1 Creating an NE by Using the Search Method


The U2000 can find all NEs that communicate with a specific gateway NE by using the IP address
of the gateway NE, the network segment of the gateway NE IP address, or the NSAP addresses.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

254

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

In addition, the U2000 can create the NEs that are found in batches. Compared with the method
of manually creating NEs, this search method creates NEs faster and more reliably.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The network management system (NMS) is communicating with NEs properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

This task can also be performed on the Web LCT, but the steps are different from those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure:
l

Creates an NE by using the search method.

Creates an NE by using the NE Search method (only on the Web LCT) if the NE is the
gateway NE and belongs to the same network segment as the NMS server.

Procedure
Step 1 Create an NE by using the search method (U2000).

Step 2 Create an NE by using the NE Search method (Web LCT).

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

255

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.9.1.2 Creating an NE Manually


If you create NEs manually, you can create them one by one instead of in batches.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The network management system (NMS) is properly communicating with the NE to be


created.

If the NE to be created is a non-gateway NE, the corresponding gateway NE has been


created.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.
NOTE

If new NEs are created manually on the Web LCT:


l SSL is recommended for communication with NEs. Set the port number to 5432 and perform the following
steps to replace the SSL certificate:
l Delete the WebLCT\conf\certificate directory on the Web LCT.
l Copy the server\etc\ssl\nemanager\default directory on the U2000 to the path WebLCT\conf on the Web
LCT. Rename default to certificate. Note that the installation path on the Web LCT should not contain
Chinese characters, spaces, or special characters.
l Restart the Web LCT.
l Install the SSL certificate to the NE using the U2000. For details, see the Security Configuration Maintenance
& Hardening.

Context
The following procedure creates NE1 manually.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

256

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Creating an NE manually

----End

8.9.1.3 Changing an NE ID
Change the NE ID according to the engineering plan to ensure that each NE ID is unique. This
task does not interrupt services.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE maintainer authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure changes an NE ID to the planned value listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

New ID

New Extended ID

After changing the NE ID, you need to restart the NE.


Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

257

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Changing an NE ID

----End

8.9.1.4 Changing an NE Name


For easier identification of an NE in Main Topology, name the NE according to its geographical
location or the device to which it is connected.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure changes an NE name to the planned value listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Name

NE1

Procedure
Step 1 Changing an NE Name
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

258

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.9.1.5 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN


The VLAN ID used by an inband data communication network (DCN) must be different from
the VLAN ID used by services. The bandwidth of an inband DCN must meet the requirements
of the transmission network for managing messages.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure sets the VLAN ID and bandwidth to the planned values listed in the
following table for an inband DCN.
Parameter

Value

VLAN ID

4094

Bandwidth(Kbit/s)

512Kbit/s

Procedure
Step 1 Setting the VLAN ID and Bandwidth for an Inband DCN
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

259

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.9.1.6 Configuring Access Control


When an NE is connected to the network management system (NMS) using an Ethernet service
port, you must configure access control.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
NOTE

l Do not use the default IP address of an access control interface to access the public network (for example,
Internet).
l The default IP address is a temporary address and is only used for the DCN plug-and-play of the NE. Users
must modify the default IP address in a timely manner.

Context
The following procedure configures the access control function for the port P&E according to
the planned parameter values listed in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Enabled Status

Enabled (default value)

IP Address

10.0.0.1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

260

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value

Subnet Mask

255.255.0.0

Procedure
Step 1 Configuring Access Control

----End

8.9.1.7 Creating a Fiber/Cable by Using the Search Method


The network management system (NMS) can find the fibers connected to a specified microwave
port or Ethernet port by using the search method. This method is the most common method for
creating microwave links.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Context
The following procedure creates a microwave link or an Ethernet link on the RTN subnet using
the search method.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

261

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1 Create a microwave link on the RTN subnet using the search method.

Step 2 Create an Ethernet link on the RTN subnet using the search method.

----End

8.9.1.8 Creating a Fiber/Cable Manually


You can create a fiber by specifying the ports connected by the fiber. This method can be used
to create both microwave links and Ethernet links.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

262

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Context
The following procedure creates a fiber manually according to the planned parameter values
listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Fiber/Cable Type

Radio Link

Name

l-1

Source NE

NE1

Source NE Subrack-Slot-Board Type-Port

1-MXUF4-1(IF)

Sink NE

NE2

Sink NE Subrack-Slot-Board Type-Port

1-MXUF4-1(IF)

Automatically Allocate IP Address

No

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.2 Configuring Microwave Links


This section provides videos to common operations of microwave link configuration.
8.9.2.1 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group
If microwave links are configured with 1+1 hot standby (HSB) protection, you need to create a
corresponding microwave 1+1 protection group.
8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link
This task helps you manage microwave links by hop.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

263

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)


This section describes how to synchronize data between the main and standby NEs in a 1+1 HSB
protection group.

8.9.2.1 Creating a Microwave 1+1 Protection Group


If microwave links are configured with 1+1 hot standby (HSB) protection, you need to create a
corresponding microwave 1+1 protection group.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

If no optical splitter is used when 1+1 HSB is configured, E-LAG needs to be configured.

The GE ports connected by a cascade port must be configured with the same port type. For
example, both are configured with "COMBO".

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure creates a microwave 1+1 protection group according to planned values
provided in the following table.
l

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

creates a microwave 1+1 protection group in LAG Mode according to planned values
provided in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Service Protection Type

LAG Mode

Reversion Mode

Revertive

WTR Time (s)

600 (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching

Enable

Working/Protection Unit Type

Working Unit

Service Port

P&E and GE(e)

cascade Port

Combo

creates a microwave 1+1 protection group in Split Mode according to planned values
provided in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Service Protection Type

LAG Mode

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

264

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value

Reversion Mode

Revertive

WTR Time (s)

600 (default value)

Enable Reverse Switching

Enable

Working/Protection Unit Type

Working Unit

Service Port

GE(o)

cascade Port

Combo

Procedure
Step 1 Create a microwave 1+1 protection group in LAG Mode.

Step 2 Create a microwave 1+1 protection group in Split Mode.

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

265

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.9.2.2 Managing a Hop of Microwave Link


This task helps you manage microwave links by hop.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The NEs at the two ends of a microwave link hop are communicating properly.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
The following parameters of the NEs on a hop of microwave link are automatically synchronized:
Link ID, IF Channel Bandwidth, AMAC, Guaranteed AMAC Capacity, Full AMAC
Capacity, Modulation Mode, T/R Spacing(MHz), and ATPC. That is, if one of the preceding
parameters is modified on an NE, the modification is automatically duplicated on the peer NE.

Background Information
The following procedure configures basic information for the hop of microwave link shown in
the following figure by configuring NE1.
Parameter

Link

NE ID

9-49316(Local Radio Terminal)


9-49317(Opposite Radio Terminal)

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Link ID

IF Channel Bandwidth

250MHz

AMAC

Enabled

Guaranteed AMAC Capacity

QPSK Strong

Full AMAC Capacity

16QAM/737Mbit/s

TX Frequency(MHz)

73500

ATPC

Disabled

TX power (dBm)

10

Power to Be Frequency(dBm)

-40

TX Status

unmute

Antenna Polarization Direction

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

266

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.2.3 Synchronizing Data Between Main and Standby NEs (1+1)


This section describes how to synchronize data between the main and standby NEs in a 1+1 HSB
protection group.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The GE ports connected by a cascade port must be configured with the same port type. For
example, both are configured with "COMBO".

You can initiate configuration synchronization only on a main NE in the working state.

If both NEs are in the working or protection state, you cannot initiate configuration
synchronization.

If an NE is being upgraded or works in CPRI mode, you cannot initiate configuration


synchronization.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

267

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.9.3 Configuring Ethernet Services on a Per-NE Basis


This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services on a
per-NE basis.
8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG
If the bandwidth or availability of the Ethernet link between two NEs needs to be improved,
create a link aggregation group (LAG).
8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance
Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is configured by creating ERPS instances.
8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service
By creating point-to-point transparently transmitted Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can
transparently transmit all packets received at the source to the sink.
8.9.3.4 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service
By creating VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can transmit service packets from
the source to a sink based on the VLAN IDs carried by the packets.
8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service
An IEEE 802.1D bridge is a transparent bridge and functions as a switching domain.
8.9.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service
An IEEE 802.1Q bridge is a virtual bridge (VB), which can be divided by VLANs into several
switching domains.
8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge
This section describes how to change the logical ports mounted to a bridge and how to modify
the attributes of the ports.
8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line Service
When an Ethernet line (E-Line) service is not used, you need to delete the service to release
Ethernet resources.
8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

268

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

When an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service is not used, you need to delete the service
to release Ethernet resources.
8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain
This section describes how to modify the mapping between packet priorities and per-hop
behaviors (PHBs) in the ingress or egress direction of a Differentiated Services (DS) domain.
8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port
This section describes how to set the packet type trusted by a port.
8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port
If DSCP-based Diffserv is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by
demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.
8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies
This section describes how to set queue scheduling policies for an egress port.

8.9.3.1 Creating a LAG


If the bandwidth or availability of the Ethernet link between two NEs needs to be improved,
create a link aggregation group (LAG).

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure:
l

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Create a non-load sharing LAG to protect the Ethernet link from a UNI-side equipment to
an NE, according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Parameter

NE

LAG No.

Assign Automatically

LAG Name

LAG

LAG Type

Static (default value)

Load Sharing

Non-Sharing

LAG Priority

32768 (default value)

Packet Receive Timeout Period

Long period

Main Ports

P&E

Standby Ports

GE(e)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

269

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Create a load sharing LAG to increase Ethernet bandwidth of Ethernet links, according to
the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Parameter

NE

LAG No.

Assign Automatically

LAG Name

LAG

LAG Type

Static (default value)

Load Sharing

Sharing

LAG Priority

32768 (default value)

Packet Receive Timeout Period

Long period

LAG Min Active Link Threshold

Main Ports

P&E

Standby Ports

COMBO
GE(o)

Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 protection according to the planned parameter values
listed in the following table.
Parameter

NE

LAG No.

Assign Automatically (default value).

LAG type

Static (default value)

Load sharing type

Non-load sharing (default value)

LAG priority

32768 (default value)

Main port

P&E

Procedure
Step 1 Create a non-load sharing LAG.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

270

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Create a load sharing LAG.

Step 3 Create a LAG for configuring 1+1 protection.

----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

271

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.9.3.2 Creating an ERPS Instance


Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) is configured by creating ERPS instances.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure creates an ERPS instance according to the planned parameter values
listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

ERPS ID

East Port

GE(o)

West Port

IF

RPL Owner Ring Node Flag

RPL Port

RPL Port

GE(o)

Control VLAN

4093

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

272

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.9.3.3 Creating a Point-to-Point Transparently Transmitted E-Line Service


By creating point-to-point transparently transmitted Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can
transparently transmit all packets received at the source to the sink.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
In point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line services, Layer 2 protocol packets are
transmitted as common services. Therefore, Layer 2 protocol packets cannot be transmitted first
in the case of link congestion.

Context
The following procedure creates the point-to-point transparently transmitted E-Line service
shown in the following figure.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

273

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.4 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service


By creating VLAN-based Ethernet line (E-Line) services, you can transmit service packets from
the source to a sink based on the VLAN IDs carried by the packets.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure creates the VLAN-based E-Line service shown in the following figure.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

274

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service


An IEEE 802.1D bridge is a transparent bridge and functions as a switching domain.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
l

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

In IEEE 802.1D bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services, Layer 2
protocol packets are transmitted as common services. Therefore, Layer 2 protocol packets
cannot be transmitted first in the case of link congestion.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

275

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

By default, the NE carries an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service that is mounted
to all the ports of the NE.

Context
The following procedure creates the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service shown in the
following figure.

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.6 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service


An IEEE 802.1Q bridge is a virtual bridge (VB), which can be divided by VLANs into several
switching domains.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

276

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services can be configured to
transparently transmit Layer 2 protocol packets as packets with a per-hop behavior (PHB) of
CS7.

Context
The following procedure creates the IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service shown in the
following figure.

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.7 Changing Logical Ports Mounted to a Bridge


This section describes how to change the logical ports mounted to a bridge and how to modify
the attributes of the ports.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

277

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) services have been configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following steps remove port GE4, that is, a GE(o) port, from the ports mounted with E-LAN
services and delete VLAN 100 from the VLAN list of microwave ports.

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.8 Deleting an E-Line Service


When an Ethernet line (E-Line) service is not used, you need to delete the service to release
Ethernet resources.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

An E-Line service has been configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

278

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure deletes the E-Line service whose ID is 1.

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.9 Deleting an E-LAN Service


When an Ethernet local area network (E-LAN) service is not used, you need to delete the service
to release Ethernet resources.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

An E-LAN service has been configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure deletes the E-LAN service whose ID is 1.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

279

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.10 Modifying the Mapping for a DS Domain


This section describes how to modify the mapping between packet priorities and per-hop
behaviors (PHBs) in the ingress or egress direction of a Differentiated Services (DS) domain.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure changes the mapping for a DS domain according to the planned
parameter values listed in the following tables.
The following table provides the values of the parameters on the Ingress tab page.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

CVLAN/SVLAN

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

Default value

Default value

0-7

BE

8-15

AF11

16-23

AF21

24-31

AF31

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

280

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

CVLAN/SVLAN

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

MPLS EXP

IP DSCP

PHB

32-39

AF41

40-47

EF

48-55

CS6

56-63

CS7

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.11 Changing the Packet Type Trusted by a Port


This section describes how to set the packet type trusted by a port.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure changes the packet types trusted by the Ethernet ports and microwave
port to the planned value listed in the following table.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

281

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Packet Type

IF

ip-dscp

P&E
COMBO
GE(o)
GE(e)

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.12 Enabling/Disabling DSCP Demapping at an Egress Port


If DSCP-based Diffserv is enabled and if you do not want the DSCP values to be changed by
demapping at egress ports, you can disable DSCP demapping.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure sets Egress DSCP Mapping Status to Disabled.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

282

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.3.13 Setting Egress Queue Scheduling Policies


This section describes how to set queue scheduling policies for an egress port.

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure configures queue scheduling policies for a microwave port according
to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Parameter

Grooming Policy After Reloading

CS7

SP

CS6

SP

EF

SP

AF4

SP

AF3

WRR(weight=25)

AF2

WRR(weight=25)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

283

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Grooming Policy After Reloading

AF1

WRR(weight=25)

BE

WRR(weight=25)

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.4 Configuring Ethernet Services (in End-to-End Mode)


This section provides hyperlinks to common operations of configuring Ethernet services in an
end-to-end mode.
8.9.4.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services
By searching for native Ethernet services, you can synchronize the configured native Ethernet
service data from the NE layer of the NMS to the network layer.
8.9.4.2 Creating a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service
This section describes how to configure a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service
in an end-to-end manner.
8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service
This section describes how to create a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-to-end manner.
8.9.4.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service
This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner.
8.9.4.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service
This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

284

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.9.4.1 Searching for Native Ethernet Services


By searching for native Ethernet services, you can synchronize the configured native Ethernet
service data from the NE layer of the NMS to the network layer.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Native Ethernet services have been correctly configured.

Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Precautions
l

Verify that cables have been created between the NEs on the topology.

This task searches for native Ethernet services that have been correctly configured but for
which no topologies have been created at the network layer of the NMS. For native Ethernet
services for which topologies have been created at the network layer of the NMS, skip this
task.

Context
The following procedure synchronizes the native E-LAN services in a specified area to the
network layer of the NMS.

Procedure
Step 1

----End
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

285

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

8.9.4.2 Creating a Transparently Transmitted Point-to-Point E-Line Service


This section describes how to configure a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service
in an end-to-end manner.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.

Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Precautions
NOTE

By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is created on an NE. The service is mounted to all
ports of the NE. Delete this E-LAN service before you create a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line
service.

Context
The following procedure creates a transparently transmitted point-to-point E-Line service
according to the planned parameter values listed in the following table.
Parameter

Value

Service name

NE1toNE2

Source NE

NE1

Source port

P&E

Sink NE

NE2

Sink port

P&E

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

286

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.9.4.3 Creating a VLAN-based E-Line Service


This section describes how to create a VLAN-based E-Line service in an end-to-end manner.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.

Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Precautions
NOTE

By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is created on an NE. The service is mounted to all
ports of the NE. Delete this E-LAN service before you create a VLAN-based E-Line service.

Context
The following procedure creates a VLAN-based E-Line service according to the planned
parameter values listed in the following table.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Parameter

Value

Service name

NE1toNE2

Source NE

NE1
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

287

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Parameter

Value

Source port

P&E

Source C-VLAN

200

Sink NE

NE2

Sink port

P&E

Sink C-VLAN

200

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.4.4 Creating an IEEE 802.1D Bridge-based E-LAN Service


This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.

Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

288

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Precautions
NOTE

By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is configured on an NE. The service is mounted to all
ports of the NE. You only need to search out the E-LAN service and then create the corresponding end-to-end
service at the network layer. This example assumes that the IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service
configured by default is deleted.

Context
The following procedure creates an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service according to the
planned parameter values listed in the following tables.
Table 8-78 Basic information
Parameter

Value

Service Type

E-LAN

Service Name

E-LAN-00001

Table 8-79 Information about mounted ports


Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

Ports mounted
to a bridge

1-MXUF4-2
(P&E)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF)

1-MXUF4-2
(P&E)

1-MXUF4-4
(GE(o))

1-MXUF4-2
(P&E)

1-MXUF4-4
(GE(o))

Procedure
Step 1

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

289

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

8.9.4.5 Creating an IEEE 802.1Q Bridge-based E-LAN Service


This section describes how to configure an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service in an endto-end manner.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Fiber/Cable connections have been created between NEs in the main topology.

Configuration data on the NMS is the same as that on NEs.

The service to be created does not conflict with existing services.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

The Web LCT does not support this operation.

Precautions
NOTE

By default, an IEEE 802.1D bridge-based E-LAN service is created on an NE. Delete this E-LAN service before
you create an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service. This example describes how to create an IEEE 802.1Q
bridge-based E-LAN service.

Context
The following procedure creates an IEEE 802.1Q bridge-based E-LAN service according to the
planned parameter values listed in the following tables.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

290

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Table 8-80 Basic information


Parameter

Value

Service Type

E-LAN

Service Name

E-LAN-00001

Table 8-81 Service information


Parameter

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

Ports mounted
to a bridge

1-MXUF4-2
(P&E) (VLAN
ID:100,200)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF) (VLAN ID:
100,200)

1-MXUF4-4
(GE(o)) (VLAN
ID:100)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF) (VLAN ID:
100)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF) (VLAN ID:
100,200)

1-MXUF4-4
(GE(o)) (VLAN
ID:100)

1-MXUF4-1
(IF) (VLAN ID:
100)

1-MXUF4-2
(P&E) (VLAN
ID:100)

1-MXUF4-2
(P&E) (VLAN
ID:200)

Procedure
Step 1

----End

8.9.5 Configuring CPRI Services


This section describes how to configure CPRI services. You must delete Ethernet service
configurations before configuring CPRI services.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

291

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Microwave links have been configured.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Precautions
1.

Configure CPRI services for the end that is remote from the NMS before configuring CPRI
services for the end that is close to the NMS, to prevent the remote NE from being
unreachable to the NMS when a link interruption occurs due to inconsistent link types.

2.

When deleting the Ethernet port, delete services and the QoS policy configured for services
on the port first.

3.

If the rate of the CPRI port is set, the channel spacing and modulation scheme must be set
based on the Table 8-82.
Table 8-82 Radio working mode that the OptiX RTN 380 supports
Rate

Transparent Transmission of
Complete CPRI Frames

Transparent Transmission of
CPRI Payloads

1.25 Gbit/s

l 16QAM/500MHz

l 16QAM Strong/750MHz
2.5 Gbit/s

32QAM/750MHz

l 64QAM/500MHz
l 16QAM/750MHz

4.

The NE will be cold reset when the CPRI port is activated.

Context
The following procedure:
l

Configure CPRI services for NE1. The port rate is 1.25 Gbit/s.
NOTE

To switch the port rate between 1.25 Gbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/s in CPRI mode, the operations are similar to
those in CPRI service configuration.

Change the CPRI mode to a non-CPRI mode.

Procedure
Step 1 Configure CPRI services.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

292

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Step 2 Change the CPRI mode to a non-CPRI mode.

----End

8.9.6 Configuring Clocks


To ensure that clocks of all the nodes on the transmission network are synchronized, configure
the clocks for these nodes according to a unified clock synchronization policy.
8.9.6.1 Configuring the System Clock Source
If OptiX RTN 380 is used to transmit CPRI services, there is no need to configure clock sources.
8.9.6.2 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources
This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. For a simple network (such
as a chain network), protection for the clock sources is not required or the clock sources are
protected according to the clock source priority table. For a complex network (such as a ring
network, a ring with chain network, or a network consisting of intersectant rings), clock sources
need to be protected by using the standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol or
the extended SSM protocol.

8.9.6.1 Configuring the System Clock Source


If OptiX RTN 380 is used to transmit CPRI services, there is no need to configure clock sources.
Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

293

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Prerequisites
You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following steps configure IFinterface as the clock source with the highest priority, the next
is GE(o).

Procedure
Step 1 Configuring the system clock source.

----End

8.9.6.2 Configuring Protection for Clock Sources


This section describes how to configure protection for clock sources. For a simple network (such
as a chain network), protection for the clock sources is not required or the clock sources are
protected according to the clock source priority table. For a complex network (such as a ring
network, a ring with chain network, or a network consisting of intersectant rings), clock sources
need to be protected by using the standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol or
the extended SSM protocol.

Prerequisites
l

You must be an NM user with NE operator authority or higher.

Clock sources have been configured.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

294

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

Tools, Equipment, and Materials


U2000
NOTE

Web LCT also supports this operation and the steps are the same as those on the U2000.

Context
The following procedure:
l

Enables the standard SSM protocol.

Enables the extended SSM protocol and sets the IDs of the clock source IF, GE(o) and the
internal clock source to 1, 2 and 3 respectively.
NOTE

l It is recommended that you enable the standard SSM protocol for a simple ring network and enable the
extended SSM protocol for a complex network (for example, a network consisting of intersectant rings,
which may provide the network with multiple clock sources).
l If the extended SSM protocol is enabled, set IDs for the following clock sources:
l Reference clock sources for a ring network
l Local clock source of an NE that traces a clock source outside the ring network
Each clock source ID must be unique and is unrelated to priorities.

Procedure
Step 1 Enable the standard SSM protocol.

Step 2 Enable the extended SSM protocol.

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

295

OptiX RTN 380 Radio Transmission System


Commissioning and Configuration Guide

8 Configuring Networkwide Service Data

----End

Issue 03 (2014-11-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

296

You might also like